JP7165402B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

In a conventional gaming machine, when a starting prize is established, determination information as to whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player is obtained, and the determination information is stored. Then, when the determination condition is established, the stored determination information is determined, and a variable performance is executed according to the result of the determination, and when the variable performance becomes a special result, a special game is executed.

In the variable production, various productions are executed, and a device is made to increase the degree of expectation that the special game will be executed. And as such an effect, after stocking one or more benefits (for example, a reach pattern), by releasing the stocked benefits, there is an effect that increases the degree of expectation that the special game will be executed. (See Patent Document 1, for example).

JP 2016-106719 A

In Patent Literature 1, although a certain effect can be expected, such as being able to draw attention to what kind of benefits are stocked, there is still room for improvement in terms of further improving the presentation and entertainment.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION An object of the present invention is to improve the performance interest in view of such circumstances.

In order to solve such problems, a gaming machine according to the present invention acquires determination information based on the entry of a game ball into a starting area in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player. means, determination means for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and effect control means for executing a variable effect according to the result of the determination, wherein the effect control means is The variable performance is executed with the variable display of the symbols , and after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable display, the symbols are stopped and displayed in a manner indicating the result of the determination, and the stopped display is being executed. an acquisition effect that can acquire a first game privilege that suggests the possibility that the special game will be executed when the first acquisition condition is satisfied at the time of the acquisition; and acquisition if a predetermined release condition is satisfied after the acquisition effect is performed When a release effect for releasing the first game privilege, a predetermined effect corresponding to the first game privilege released by the release effect, and a second acquisition condition different from the first acquisition condition are established. It is possible to execute an update effect of acquiring a second game privilege and renewing the period of the acquired second game privilege, and a post-update effect after the update of the period is completed, and the release effect is Suggesting the content of the predetermined performance, executing the predetermined performance after executing the release performance, and suggesting the content of the post-update performance after the updating of the period in the update performance is completed. It is possible to execute the post-update effect without releasing the acquired first game privilege in the release effect, and execute the special game without releasing the acquired first game privilege in the release effect, and the special game is not released after the special game ends. A first game privilege can be released, and the acquired first game privilege can be notified by displaying a predetermined image, and the predetermined image is a first privilege image and different from the first privilege image. Including a second privilege image, the privilege given to the player after the first privilege image is displayed differs from the privilege given to the player after the second privilege image is displayed .

According to the present invention, the performance interest can be improved.

1 is a front view of a game machine; FIG. It is a perspective view of the gaming machine with the glass frame opened. It is a perspective view of the back side of the gaming machine. It is a block diagram of the entire gaming machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the big-hit determination table of a big-hit lottery. It is a figure which shows an example of a special design determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of a setting data table at the time of a jackpot game completion. It is a diagram showing an example of a special electric accessary product operation mode determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of a special winning opening opening mode determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of a special figure fluctuation pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of the advance determination table of a jackpot lottery. It is a figure which shows an example of the table regarding a normal design and a starting movable piece. 4 is a diagram showing an example of various storage areas of a main RAM; FIG. It is a figure which shows the main process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the timer interrupt processing in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the input control process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the 1st starting opening detection switch input process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the 2nd starting opening detection switch input process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the special figure special electric control processing in a main control board. It is a diagram showing a special symbol storage determination process in the main control board. It is a figure which shows the jackpot determination process in a main control board. It is a diagram showing a special symbol variation process in the main control board. It is a figure which shows the special design stop processing in a main control board. It is a diagram showing a jackpot game process in the main control board. It is a diagram showing a jackpot game end process in the main control board. It is a figure which shows the normal figure normal electric control processing in a main control board. It is a diagram showing normal symbol variation processing in the main control board. It is a diagram showing an auxiliary game process in the main control board. It is a figure which shows the main process in a production|presentation control part. It is a figure which shows the timer interrupt processing in a production|presentation control part. It is a figure which shows the command analysis process (1) in a production|presentation control part. It is a figure which shows the command analysis process (2) in a production|presentation control part. It is a figure which shows the icon change production|presentation determination process in a production|presentation control part. It is a figure which shows an example of an icon final display mode determination table. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a change scenario determination table; FIG. It is a figure which shows the fluctuation|variation production|presentation pattern determination process in a production|presentation control part. It is a figure which shows an example of a fluctuation|variation production|presentation pattern determination table (low probability non-time-saving game state). It is a figure which shows an example of a fluctuation production|presentation pattern determination table (high probability time-saving game state). It is a figure which shows the jackpot announcement production|presentation determination processing in an production|presentation control part. It is a figure which shows an example of the advance notice determination table before a reach. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a dialogue pattern determination table, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a step-up pattern determination table. (a) is a diagram showing an example of an in-reach announcement determination table, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a character group pattern determination table. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a title pattern determination table, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a cut-in pattern determination table. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a button pattern determination table, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a determination effect 2 pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the stock announcement production|presentation determination process in an production|presentation control part. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a first stock advance notice determination table, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a second stock notice determination table. It is a figure which shows the 1st stock preliminary announcement production|presentation determination processing in an production|presentation control part. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the stock determination table for the variable icon, (b) is a diagram showing an example of the stock determination table for the title notice effect, and (c) is a diagram showing the stock determination table for the cut-in notice effect. It is a figure which shows an example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a stock determination table for development effect, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a stock determination table for final effect 1. FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of a stock display mode determination table for the first stock notice effect; It is a figure which shows the 2nd stock notice effect determination processing in the effect control part. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a stock determination table for tenpai effect, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a stock display mode determination table for tenpai effect. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a stock determination table for a final effect 2, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a stock display mode determination table for a final effect 2. FIG. It is a figure which shows the timer production|presentation determination process in a production|presentation control part. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a change timer frequency determination table, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of an event timer frequency determination table. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a suggestive event determination table for one-time timer; (a) is a diagram showing an example of a first suggested event determination table for two timers, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a second suggested event determination table for two timers. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of an update pattern determination table; FIG. It is a timing chart when one event timer effect is executed during the variable effect in which the SP ready-to-win effect is executed. It is a timing chart when one event timer effect is executed during the variable effect in which the SPSP ready-to-win effect is executed. It is a timing chart when the event timer effect is executed twice during the variable effect. It is a figure which shows the example of the production|presentation in which three timer production|presentations are performed during variable production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the example of the production|presentation in which three timer production|presentations are performed during variable production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the example of the production|presentation in which two timer production|presentations are performed during variable production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the example of the production|presentation in which two timer production|presentations are performed during variable production|presentation. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining icons in the first stock effect; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of an icon acquisition effect in the first stock effect during the variable effect. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of icon release effects in the first stock effect during the variable effect. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of icon release effects in the first stock effect during the variable effect. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing another example of icon release in the first stock effect during the variable effect. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing another effect example of icon acquisition and an effect example of icon release in the first stock effect during the variable effect. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining icons in the second stock effect; FIG. 12 is a diagram showing an example of icon acquisition in the second stock effect during the variable effect. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of icon release effects in the second stock effect during the variable effect. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of icon change effect in the second stock effect during the variable effect. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of icon acquisition effect and another example of icon release effect in the second stock effect during variable effect. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of icon acquisition in the third stock effect during the variable effect. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing an example of icon release effects in the third stock effect during the variable effect. It is a figure which shows the production example in a jackpot game.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be specifically described with reference to the drawings.

(Configuration of game machine 1)
First, the configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 3. FIG. FIG. 1 is an example of a front view of a gaming machine 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention. Also, FIG. 2 is an example of a perspective view of the gaming machine 1 with the glass frame opened according to the embodiment of the present invention. Also, FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the back side of the gaming machine 1 according to the embodiment of the present invention.

The gaming machine 1 includes an outer frame 60 attached to an island facility of a game arcade, and a glass frame 50 rotatably supported by the outer frame 60 (see FIGS. 1 and 2). Further, the outer frame 60 is provided with a game board 2 in which a game area 6 in which game balls 200 flow down is formed.

The glass frame 50 includes an audio output device 32 consisting of a speaker, a frame illumination device 34b having a plurality of lamps (LEDs), an effect button 35 for changing the effect mode by pressing, and at least two directions (this A cross key 36 that can be pressed in four directions in the embodiment is provided.

The audio output device 32 outputs BGM (background music), SE (sound effects), etc., and performs sound effects. Further, the frame lighting devices 34b are provided at a plurality of positions so as to perform illumination effects by changing the irradiation direction and emission color of light from each lamp.

The effect button 35 is provided with a effect button detection switch 35a, and when the effect button detection switch 35a detects the player's operation, a further effect is executed in response to this operation. Similarly, the cross key 36 is also provided with a cross key detection switch 36b so that the player can input predetermined information to the gaming machine 1 (see FIG. 4).
In particular, in this embodiment, the production button 35 is configured to be vertically movable by the production button drive motor 35b (see FIG. 4).
Note that an operation means having a role similar to that of the production button 35 may be separately provided. For example, a production lever may be provided. When the effect lever is provided, the degree of expectation for the jackpot game may be different between when the effect button 35 is operated and when the effect lever is operated.

Further, the glass frame 50 is provided with an operation handle 3 for shooting game balls toward the game area 6 by being rotated, and a tray 40 for storing a plurality of game balls. , and has a downward slope so that the game balls flow down in the direction of the operating handle 3 (see FIG. 2). A receiving port for receiving a game ball is provided at the end of the downward slope of the receiving tray 40. The game ball received in this receiving port is driven by the ball feed solenoid 4b to move the glass frame 50. Game balls are delivered one by one to a ball delivery opening 41 provided on the back surface.

Then, the game ball sent to the ball feed opening 41 is guided to the downwardly inclined end portion of the shooting rail 42 by the shooting rail 42 having a downward slope toward the hitting member 4c. A stopper 43 for stopping the game ball is provided above the end of the downward slope of the launch rail 42, and the game ball sent out from the ball feeding opening 41 is pushed to the end of the downward slope of the launch rail 42. One game ball will be parked at the part (see FIG. 2).

When the player touches the operating handle 3, the touch sensor 3a (see FIG. 4) provided inside the operating handle 3 detects contact between the operating handle 3 and the player. Thereafter, when the player rotates the operating handle 3, the shooting volume 3b directly connected to the operating handle 3 also rotates, the shooting volume 3b adjusts the shooting intensity of the game ball, and the game ball is shot with the adjusted shooting intensity. The driving member 4c directly connected to the solenoid 4a rotates. By rotating the hitting member 4c, the game ball 200 stored at the downwardly inclined end portion of the shooting rail 42 is hit by the hitting member 4c, and the game ball is shot to the game area 6.例文帳に追加

When the game ball shot as described above rises from the shooting rail 42 between the rails 5a and 5b and exceeds the ball return prevention piece 5c, it reaches the game area 6 and then freely falls within the game area 6. do. At this time, the game balls fall unpredictably due to a plurality of nails and pinwheels provided in the game area 6.例文帳に追加

In the game area 6 of the game board 2, there are various winning openings (general winning opening 12, normal pattern gate 13, first starting opening 14, second starting opening 15, first big winning opening 16, second big winning opening 17), an image display device 31, and a decorative member 7 surrounding the display area of the image display device 31 are provided.

On the other hand, outside the game area 6 of the game board 2, there are a first special symbol display device 20, a second special symbol display device 21, a normal symbol display device 22, and a first special symbol reservation display device 23. , a second special symbol reservation display 24 and a normal symbol reservation display 25 are provided.

In the lower left part of the game area 6, a game ball launched (so-called left-handed) toward the left area of the game area 6 can win (enter the ball), and can be launched toward the right area of the game area 6. (So-called right-handed) game balls are not allowed to enter three general prize-winning openings 12 are provided, and right-handed game balls can win (entrance) at the lower right side of the game area 6. There is provided one general winning hole 12 in which left-handed game balls cannot win.

Here, each general winning hole 12 is provided with a general winning hole detection switch 12a for detecting winning of a game ball (entering a ball). Then, when it is detected that the game balls have entered the general winning hole 12, a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, 10 game balls) are paid out from a payout device for paying out the game balls. .

In the lower central part of the game area 6, there is a first starting port 14 which constitutes a starting area in which left-handed game balls can win and right-handed game balls cannot win, and left-handed game balls. , and a second starting port 15 forming a starting area in which a right-handed game ball can win (enter a ball) are arranged vertically.

The second starting port 15 includes a starting movable piece 15b and a starting port opening/closing solenoid 15c that constitute a normal electric accessory (starting port opening and closing device) for facilitating the winning of game balls to the second starting port 15. It has a closed state (closed mode) in which the starting movable piece 15b stands vertically by the operation of the starting opening opening and closing solenoid 15c and regulates the winning of the game ball to the second starting opening 15, and the starting movable piece 15b is tilted and controlled to be converted to an open state (open mode) that allows the winning of game balls to the second starting port 15.例文帳に追加When the second starting port 15 is in the open state, the starting movable piece 15b functions as a tray for guiding the game ball to the second starting port 15, so the game ball to the second starting port 15 is more likely to reach the second starting port 15 than when it is in the closed state. winning opportunities (winning ratio) will increase.

Here, the first starting port 14 is provided with a first starting port detection switch 14a for detecting the winning of a game ball (entering a ball), and the second starting port 15 is provided with a winning of a game ball (entering a ball). ) is provided with a second starting port detection switch 15a. When the winning of the game ball to the first starting hole 14 or the second starting hole 15 is detected, a random value for judging a big hit is obtained for performing a "big win lottery (judgment of a big win)" to be described later.

Further, when it is detected that a game ball has entered the first starting port 14 or the second starting port 15, in addition to the above-mentioned random number for judging a big hit, a random number for determining a special symbol for determining a special symbol to be stopped and displayed is generated. , The reach determination random number and special figure fluctuation random number for determining the fluctuation time of the special symbol are also acquired. In addition, the random number for big hit determination, the random number for special design determination, the random number for reach determination, and the random number for special figure fluctuation are called special figure determination information.

Furthermore, when the winning of game balls into the first starting port 14 is detected, a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, three game balls) are paid out from the payout device. Further, when the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 15 is detected, a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, one game ball) are paid out from the payout device. The number of prize balls paid out when the game balls enter the first start port 14 and the number of prize balls paid out when the game balls enter the second start port 15 may be the same.

On the left and right sides of the game area 6, there are provided normal symbol gates 13 that form a normal area through which game balls can pass.

Here, the normal symbol gate 13 is provided with a gate detection switch 13a for detecting passage (entry) of a game ball. Then, when the passage of the game ball to the normal symbol gate 13 is detected, a random value for hit determination is acquired for performing a "hit lottery (hit determination)" described later.

When the game ball passing through the normal symbol gate 13 is detected, in addition to the hit determination random value, the normal symbol determination random value for determining the normal symbol to be stopped and displayed, and the variation time of the normal symbol. A random number for normal/universal pattern fluctuation for determination is also acquired. In addition, the random number value for hit determination, the random number value for normal pattern determination, and the random number value for normal pattern fluctuation are referred to as normal pattern determination information.

In the area on the right side of the game area 6, there is a first big winning opening 16 in which a right-handed game ball can win (enter a ball) and a left-handed game ball cannot win, and a second big winning. The openings 17 are vertically spaced apart (with a width through which game balls can pass).

The first big winning hole 16 opens and closes the first big winning hole constituting a first special electric accessory (first big winning hole opening/closing device) for facilitating the entry of game balls into the first big winning hole 16. It has a door 16b and a first big prize winning opening opening/closing solenoid 16c, and when the first big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 16c operates, the first big winning opening/closing door 16b stands substantially vertically and the first big winning opening 16 opens. A closed state (closed mode) for regulating the winning of game balls to and an open state (open mode) for allowing the winning of game balls to the first big winning port 16 by tilting the first big winning port open/close door 16b. and is controlled by conversion. When the first big winning opening 16 is in the open state, the first big winning opening opening/closing door 16b functions as a tray for guiding game balls to the first big winning opening 16. The winning chance (winning ratio) of the game ball to the winning hole 16 is increased.

Here, the first big winning hole 16 is provided with a first big winning hole detection switch 16a for detecting winning of a game ball (entering a ball). Then, when the winning of game balls into the first big winning hole 16 is detected, a preset number of prize balls (for example, 15 game balls) are paid out.

The second big winning hole 17 opens and closes the second big winning hole constituting a second special electric accessory (second big winning hole opening/closing device) for facilitating the entry of game balls into the second big winning hole 17. It has a door 17b and a second big prize winning opening opening/closing solenoid 17c, and when the second big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 17c operates, the second big winning opening opening/closing door 17b stands substantially vertically and the second big winning opening/closing solenoid 17 is opened. A closed state (closed mode) for regulating the winning of game balls to and an open state (open mode) for allowing the winning of game balls to the second big winning port 17 by tilting the second big winning port open/close door 17b. and is controlled by conversion. When the second large winning opening 17 is in the open state, the second large winning opening opening/closing door 17b functions as a receiving tray for guiding the game balls to the second large winning opening 17. The winning chance (winning ratio) of the game ball to the winning hole 17 is increased.

Here, the second big winning hole 17 is provided with a second big winning hole detection switch 17a for detecting winning of a game ball (entering a ball). Then, when the winning of game balls into the second big winning hole 17 is detected, preset prize balls (for example, 15 game balls) are paid out. The number of prize balls put out when the game balls enter the first big prize hole 16 and the number of prize balls put out when the game balls win the second big prize hole 17 may be different.

At the bottom of the game area 6, win any of the general winning opening 12, the first starting opening 14, the second starting opening 15, the first big winning opening 16, and the second big winning opening 17 (ball winning) An out port 11 is provided for discharging game balls that have not been played outside the game area.

Also, in the center of the game area 6, an image display device 31 configured by an LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) or the like is provided.

The image display device 31 displays a customer waiting effect image during standby when no game is played, or displays a game effect image according to the progress of the game. Among them, three production patterns 38 (left pattern, middle pattern, right pattern) for informing the lottery result of the jackpot in the variable production described later are variably displayed, and a combination of specific production patterns 38 (for example, 777 etc.) ) is stop-displayed, a big win is notified as a big-win lottery result, and a loss is reported as a big-win lottery result by stop-displaying a combination (for example, 289, etc.) other than the specific performance pattern 38.例文帳に追加.

This production pattern 38 starts variable display in accordance with the start of the variable display of the special symbols executed based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 14 or the second start port 15. , stop display is performed according to the stop display of the special symbol after the lapse of a predetermined fluctuation time. That is, the timing of variable display of the production pattern 38 and the special pattern and the timing of the stop display of the production pattern 38 and the special pattern correspond to each other (they are the same time).

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, even when the game ball wins (ball enters) the first start port 14, even when the game ball wins (ball enters) the second start port 15, the fluctuation In the production, the same kind of production patterns 38 are displayed variably or stopped. However, when the game ball enters the first start port 14 and when the game ball enters the second start port 15, different types of production patterns 38 are displayed in a variable manner or stopped. You can configure it.

In addition, on the lower right side of the display section of the image display device 31, three small effect symbols 48 for notifying the lottery result of the big win in the variable effect are scrolled in the vertical direction (from top to bottom in this embodiment). It is displayed variably.

The variable display of the small effect symbol 48 is started corresponding to the start of the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and corresponds to the stop of the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. and is stopped.
That is, the variable display of the small effect design 48 is performed corresponding to the variable display of the first special design or the second special design, and the first special design or , the execution state of the variable display of the second special symbol is notified (suggested) to the player.

It should be noted that the small effect pattern 48, like the effect pattern 38, is composed of, for example, patterns showing numbers from "1" to "9". It is designed to stop for a predetermined time in a predetermined mode (losing mode, big win mode, etc.) showing the result of the jackpot lottery. The jackpot mode (special result mode) is a combination of the same small effect patterns 48 such as "777" or a combination of small effect patterns 48 with regularity such as "357", and the losing mode is that. It is an aspect other than this.

In addition, in the display area of the image display device 31, among the special figure determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 14, the jackpot lottery (jackpot determination) has not been executed (undecided). A first reserved icon display area 31a for icon display so that the player can easily grasp the first special symbol reserved number (U1) indicating the number of figure determination information, and a winning of the game ball to the second start port 15 Of the special figure determination information acquired based on, the second special symbol reservation number (U2) indicating the number of special figure determination information for which the big hit lottery (jackpot determination) has not been executed (undecided) so that the player can easily grasp The second pending icon display area 31b for icon display, and the information indicating the special figure determination information during execution of the variable display (variable effect) so that the player can easily grasp the variable icon for icon display A display area 31c is provided.

In the following description, the icons displayed in the first pending icon display area 31a and the second pending icon display area 31b are referred to as "suspended icons (special figure determination information for which the jackpot determination has not been executed and pending information )”, and the icon displayed in the variable icon display area 31c is referred to as “the variable icon (the special figure determination information that has been executed for the jackpot determination and the variable display (variation effect) is being executed. Equivalent to information).

The decorative member 7 surrounding the display area of the image display device 31 is provided with a wall portion erected from the game board 2 on the outer circumference thereof so that the game ball does not pass in front of the display area of the image display device 31. It is

Board lighting devices 34a having a plurality of lamps (LEDs, etc.) are provided on both the left and right sides of the decorative member 7, and above the decorative member 7, the title (model name) of the game machine "Signboard is provided, and a second decorative member 33b (effect accessory) imitating a "sword" is provided on the right side of the decorative member 7. As shown in FIG.

The first decorative member 33a is driven by a board driving device 33 composed of a solenoid, a motor, etc., and is capable of moving in the vertical direction. can move. Similarly, the second decorative member 33b is also driven by the board driving device 33, and can tilt leftward with the lower part of the second decorative member 33b as a fulcrum and move to the front of the image display device 31. FIG. The second decorative member 33b is composed of a sheath portion 33b1 imitating a scabbard and a blade portion 33b2 housed in the scabbard. be able to.

At least one of the first decorative member 33a and the second decorative member 33b may be provided with a liquid crystal display, and at least one of the pending icon display area and the variable icon display area may be provided on the liquid crystal display. One of the liquid crystal display provided on the decorative member 33a and the liquid crystal display provided on the second decorative member 33b may be provided with the pending icon display area and the other may be provided with the variable icon display area.

The first special symbol display device 20 displays the lottery result (judgment result) of the jackpot lottery (jackpot determination) executed based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 14, and displays the first special symbol over a predetermined time. After the first special symbol of the type corresponding to the lottery result is displayed in a variable manner, it is notified by stopping and displaying, and is composed of a plurality of lighting members such as LEDs.

The second special symbol display device 21 displays the lottery result (judgment result) of the jackpot lottery (jackpot determination) executed based on the winning of the game ball to the second start port 15, and displays the second special symbol over a predetermined time. After the variable display, the second special symbol of the type corresponding to the lottery result is stopped and displayed, and is composed of a plurality of lighting members such as LEDs.

The first special symbol display device 20 and/or the second special symbol display device 21 can also be configured by 7-segment LEDs. For example, it may be constructed such that "7" is displayed in a stopped state when the jackpot is won, and "-" is displayed in a stopped state when the game is lost.

Here, the "jackpot lottery" means that when a game ball wins (enters) the first start port 14 or the second start port 15, a random value for judging a big hit is obtained, and the obtained random number for judging a big hit is A process (jackpot determination) for determining whether a random number value corresponds to a "jackpot".

Also, in the present embodiment, "jackpot" refers to a jackpot game ( It means that the player has acquired the right to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player.

In the "jackpot game", a round game in which the first big prize opening 16 (first special electric role) or the second big prize opening 17 (second special electric role) is opened is a special electric role is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 4 times or 16 times) by activating the accessory continuous actuating device for continuously activating the .

A predetermined time is set for the maximum opening time (operation time of the special electric accessory) of the first big winning hole 16 or the second big winning hole 17 in each round game. When a predetermined number of game balls (for example, nine) enter the winning hole 16 or the second big winning hole 17, one round game ends. In other words, the "jackpot game" is a game in which a game ball enters the first big winning hole 16 or the second big winning hole 17 and the player can win a prize ball corresponding to the winning ball. is. In addition, in this embodiment, a plurality of types of jackpot games are provided, which will be described later in detail.

In addition, even if a game ball enters the first starting port 14 or the second starting port 15 during variable display of special symbols or during a jackpot game (special game), the jackpot lottery cannot be performed immediately. In such cases, the right to the jackpot lottery is reserved under certain conditions.

More specifically, the special figure determination information acquired when the game ball wins (entrance) in the first start port 14 is stored as the first reservation to the limit of four, and the game is played in the second start port 15 The special figure determination information acquired when the ball wins (enters the ball) is stored as a second reservation, and up to four pieces are stored. The first special symbol reservation number (U1), which is the number of the first reservation, and the second special symbol reservation number (U2), which is the number of the second reservation, are the first special symbol reservation display 23 and the second special It is displayed on the symbol reservation display device 24 .

In addition, when the first reservation is one, the leftmost LED of the first special symbol reservation display 23 is lit, and when the first reservation is two, the leftmost end of the first special symbol reservation display 23 , two LEDs light up. Also, when there are three first reservations, the three LEDs from the leftmost end of the first special symbol reservation display 23 flash and the LED on the right lights up, and when there are four first reservations, the first Four LEDs from the leftmost end of the special symbol holding display 23 are lit. Also, in the second special symbol reservation display 24, the number of reservations of the second reservation is displayed in the same manner as described above.

In addition, the normal symbol display device 22 provided outside the game area 6 of the game board 2 is a lottery result (judgment result) is notified by displaying normal symbols in a variable manner for a predetermined period of time and then stopping and displaying normal symbols of a type corresponding to the result of the lottery, and is composed of a plurality of lighting members composed of LEDs or the like. It is

Here, "winning lottery" is a random number value obtained by acquiring a random number value for winning determination when a game ball passes through the normal symbol gate 13, and the obtained random number value for winning determination corresponds to "winning". It refers to the process of determining whether or not (hit determination).

Further, in the present embodiment, "winning" means that the player has acquired the right to execute an auxiliary game advantageous to the player in the winning lottery executed based on the passing of the game ball through the normal symbol gate 13. Say. In the "auxiliary game", the starting movable piece 15b of the second starting port 15 is converted and controlled to the open state over a predetermined time. In other words, the "auxiliary game" is a game in which a game ball enters the second starting port 15 (enters a ball) and the player can win a prize ball corresponding to the winning. In addition, in this embodiment, a plurality of types of auxiliary games are provided, which will be described later in detail.

In addition, as with the special symbols, even if the game ball passes through the normal symbol gate 13, such as during the variable display of the normal symbols or during the auxiliary game, if the winning lottery cannot be performed immediately, under certain conditions, The right of the winning lottery is reserved.

More specifically, the normal pattern determination information acquired when the game ball passes through the normal pattern gate 13 is stored as a limit of 4 pieces as the third reservation. The number of normal design reservations (G), which is the number of third reservations, is displayed on the normal design reservation display device 25 in the same manner as the first special design reservation display device 23 and the second special design reservation display device 24. be done.

Further, as shown in FIG. 2, the glass frame 50 supports a glass plate 52 that covers the game area 6 in front of the game board 2 (on the player's side) so as to be visible. Note that the glass plate 52 is detachably fixed to the glass frame 50 .

The glass frame 50 is connected to the outer frame 60 via a hinge mechanism portion 51 at one end in the left-right direction (for example, the left side when facing the game machine 1), and the hinge mechanism portion 51 serves as a fulcrum. The other end side (for example, the right side facing the gaming machine 1) can be rotated in a direction to release it from the outer frame 60. As shown in FIG. The glass frame 50 covers the game board 2 together with the glass plate 52 and rotates like a door with the hinge mechanism 51 as a fulcrum, thereby opening the inner part of the outer frame 60 including the game board 2 .

A lock mechanism for fixing the other end of the glass frame 50 to the outer frame 60 is provided on the other end of the glass frame 50 in the left-right direction. Fixation by the lock mechanism can be released with a dedicated key. The glass frame 50 is also provided with a door open switch 133 for detecting whether or not the glass frame 50 is released from the outer frame 60 .

As shown in FIG. 3, the rear surface of the gaming machine 1 is provided with a main control board 110, an effect control board 120, a payout control board 130, a power supply board 140, a game information output terminal board 30, and the like. Further, the power supply board 140 is provided with a power plug 141 for supplying electric power to the game machine 1, a frame control board 180 and a power switch (not shown).

(Overall block diagram of gaming machine 1)
Next, control means for controlling the progress of the game will be described using the overall block diagram of the gaming machine 1 in FIG. FIG. 4 is an overall block diagram of the gaming machine 1. As shown in FIG.

The main control board 110 controls the basic operation (progress) of the game, inputs various detection signals such as the first starting opening detection switch 14a, and controls the first special symbol display device 20 and the first big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 16c. etc. is driven to control the game.

The main control board 110 is connected to the performance control board 120 , the payout control board 130 and the power supply board 140 . Communication between the main control board 110 and the effect control board 120 is configured so that data can be communicated only in one direction from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 120, and the main control board 110 and the payout control board 130 Communication is configured so that data can be communicated in both directions. Also, the main control board 110 receives power supply voltage from the power supply board 140 .

In addition, the main control board 110 has a main CPU 110a that performs arithmetic processing, a main ROM 110b that stores game control programs and various data and tables required for game control, and a main RAM 110c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing. It has at least a built-in one-chip microcomputer 110m, an input port and an output port (not shown) for main control, and a RAM clear switch 111a.

This input port for main control includes a payout control board 130, a RAM clear switch 111a for inputting a signal for clearing the stored contents of the main RAM 110c, and a general controller for detecting that a game ball has entered the general prize winning opening 12. A winning opening detection switch 12a, a gate detection switch 13a for detecting that a game ball has passed through a normal pattern gate 13, a first start opening detection switch 14a for detecting that a game ball has entered the first start opening 14, A second start opening detection switch 15a for detecting that a game ball has entered the second start opening 15, a first large winning opening detection switch 16a for detecting that a game ball has entered the first large winning opening 16, A second big winning hole detection switch 17a for detecting that a game ball has entered the second big winning hole 17 is connected. Various signals are input to the main control board 110 through this input port for main control.

In addition, the output port for the main control, effect control board 120, payout control board 130, starting opening opening and closing solenoid 15c for opening and closing the starting movable piece 15b of the second starting opening 15, the first big winning opening opening and closing door 16b. First big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 16c to operate, second big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 17c to operate second big winning opening opening/closing door 17b, first special symbol display device 20 and second special symbol display device for displaying special symbols 21, a normal design display device 22 for displaying normal designs, a first special design reservation display 23 and a second special design reservation display 24 for displaying the reserved number of special designs, and a normal design reservation for displaying the reserved number of normal designs. A display device 25, a game information output terminal board 30 for outputting an external information signal, and the like are connected. Various signals are output from this output port for main control.

The main CPU 110a reads out the program stored in the main ROM 110b based on the input signals from the detection switches and timers, performs arithmetic processing, and directly controls each device and display, or uses the result of the arithmetic processing. Send commands to other boards accordingly.

In the main ROM 110b, in addition to the game control program, there is a jackpot determination table (see FIG. 5) used for the jackpot lottery, a special symbol determination table (see FIG. 6) for determining the special symbols to be stopped and displayed, and a jackpot completion table (see FIG. 6). A set data table at the end of the jackpot game for determining the subsequent game state (see FIG. 7), a special electric accessory operation mode determination table (see FIG. 8) for determining the opening and closing conditions of the opening and closing door of the big winning opening, and a big winning opening Open mode table (see FIG. 9), special symbol variation pattern determination table (see FIG. 10) for determining the variation pattern of special symbols, pre-determination table for jackpot lottery (see FIG. 11), hit determination table referenced for winning lottery (see FIG. 12), etc. are stored.
It should be noted that the tables described above are merely examples of characteristic tables among the tables in the present embodiment, and many other tables and programs (not shown) are provided during the progress of the game. ing.

The main RAM 110c has a special symbol special electric processing data storage area, a normal symbol normal electric processing data storage area, a normal symbol retention number (G) storage area, a normal symbol retention storage area, a stop normal symbol data storage area, and a first special symbol retention. Number (U1) storage area, 2nd special symbol holding number (U2) storage area, 1st jackpot determination random number storage area, 2nd jackpot determination random number storage area, number of round games (R) storage area, number of times opened (K) storage area, large winning opening winning ball counter (C) storage area, second starting opening winning ball counter (D), start release counter, high probability game flag storage area, time saving game flag storage area, high probability game Number of times (X) storage area, number of time-saving games (J) storage area, game state buffer, stop special figure data storage area, stop normal figure data storage area, transmission data storage area for production, special symbol time counter, special game timer counter , Various timer counters such as an auxiliary game timer counter are provided.
Note that the above-described storage area is only an example, and many other storage areas are provided.

The game information output terminal board 30 is a board for outputting an external information signal generated in the main control board 110 or the payout control board 130 to a hall computer or the like of the game parlor. The game information output terminal board 30 is wire-connected to the main control board 110, and is provided with a plurality of connectors (terminals) for connecting external information to a hall computer or the like of the game parlor.

The effect control board 120 mainly controls each effect such as during a game or during standby, and an effect control unit 120m that comprehensively manages the contents of the game effect, and an image control unit that controls the display of images in the image display device 31. 150, a drive control unit 160 that controls driving of solenoids, motors, etc. in the board drive device 33, and a lamp control unit 170 that controls lighting of LEDs, etc., in the board lighting device 34a.

This performance control board 120 is connected to the main control board 110 , the power supply board 140 and the frame control board 180 . Communication between the effect control board 120 and the frame control board 180 is configured so that data can be communicated bidirectionally, and the effect control board 120 receives power supply voltage from the power supply board 140 .

The effect control section 120m includes a sub CPU 120a, a sub ROM 120b, and a sub RAM 120c.

The sub CPU 120a receives commands from the main control board 110, or based on input signals from the effect button detection switch 35a, the cross key detection switch 36b, etc. received from the frame control board 180, which will be described later. Reads out a program to perform arithmetic processing, and based on the processing, instructs the image control unit 150, the drive control unit 160, the lamp control unit 170, and the frame control board 180 to execute various effects. (send data).

For example, when the sub CPU 120a receives a variation pattern designation command indicating a variation mode of a special symbol from the main control board 110, it analyzes the contents of the received variation pattern designation command, and performs image display device 31, audio output device 32, board Effect data (effect pattern designation command, etc., which will be described later) for causing the drive device 33, the board lighting device 34a, the frame lighting device 34b, and the effect button driving motor 35b to execute a predetermined effect is determined. Then, the determined effect data is transmitted to the image control unit 150, the drive control unit 160, the lamp control unit 170, and the frame control board 180, thereby performing control for executing the variable effect.

In the sub ROM 120b, in addition to a program for controlling effects, a variable effect pattern determination table for determining a variable effect pattern for executing a variable effect, etc. are stored in the sub ROM 120b. It should be noted that the tables described above are merely examples of characteristic tables among the tables in the present embodiment, and many other tables and programs (not shown) are provided during the progress of the game. ing.

The sub-RAM 120c functions as a data work area during arithmetic processing of the sub-CPU 120a, and has a plurality of storage areas.

The image control unit 150 is connected to the image display device 31, and performs image display control on the image display device 31 based on various data for effects transmitted from the effect control unit 120m (sub CPU 120a). At this time, between the image control unit 150 and the image display device 31, a general-purpose substrate 39 having a bridge function for converting image data into a predetermined image format and outputting the image data is provided.

This general-purpose substrate 39 has a bridge function for converting image data into an image format corresponding to the performance of the image display device 31 for displaying image data. is connected as the image display device 31 and when a 17-inch XGA (1024 dots×768 dots) liquid crystal display device is connected as the image display device 31, the difference in resolution is absorbed.

The image control unit 150 includes a liquid crystal control CPU 150 a , a liquid crystal control RAM 150 b , a liquid crystal control ROM 150 c , a drawing control unit 151 (VDP: Video Display Processor), a CGROM 152 , a VRAM 153 and a crystal oscillator 154 .

The liquid crystal control CPU 150a creates a display list composed of a group of drawing control commands based on the data for effects (such as the effect pattern designation command) transmitted from the effect control section 120m, and sends this display list to the drawing control section 151. By transmitting the image data stored in the CGROM 152 to the image display device 31, an instruction is given to display the image data.

Further, upon receiving a V-blank interrupt signal or a drawing end signal from the drawing control unit 151, the liquid crystal control CPU 150a appropriately performs interrupt processing.

The liquid crystal control RAM 150b is incorporated in the liquid crystal control CPU 150a, functions as a data work area during arithmetic processing of the liquid crystal control CPU 150a, and temporarily stores data read from the liquid crystal control ROM 150c.

The liquid crystal control ROM 150c is composed of a mask ROM and the like, and includes a control processing program for the liquid crystal control CPU 150a, a display list generation program for generating a display list, and an animation of effects using images corresponding to data for effects. An animation pattern, animation scene information, and the like for displaying are stored.

The animation pattern is referred to when displaying the animation, and stores the combination of animation scene information of images corresponding to the rendering data, the display order of each animation scene information, and the like. In addition, animation scene information includes wait frames (display time), target data (sprite identification number, transfer source address, etc.), parameters (sprite display position, transfer destination address, etc.), drawing method, and effect image. It stores information such as information specifying a display device.

The CGROM 152 is composed of flash memory, EEPROM, EPROM, mask ROM, etc., and stores compressed image data (sprite, movie), etc., which is a collection of pixel information in a predetermined range of pixels (for example, 32 pixels x 32 pixels). is doing. This pixel information is composed of color number information that specifies a color number for each pixel and an α value that indicates the transparency of the image. The CGROM 152 is read in units of image data by the drawing control unit 151, and image processing is performed in units of image data of this frame.

Further, the CGROM 152 stores uncompressed palette data in which color number information specifying a color number and display color information for actually displaying colors are associated with each other. It should be noted that the CGROM 152 may be configured to compress only a portion of the image data without compressing all of the image data. As a movie compression method, various known compression methods such as MPEG4 can be used.

The crystal oscillator 154 outputs a pulse signal to the drawing control unit 151 and divides the pulse signal to generate a system clock for the drawing control unit 151 to control and a synchronization signal for synchronizing with the image display device 31 . A signal or the like is generated.

The VRAM 153 is composed of an SRAM with which image data can be written or read at high speed. The VRAM 153 has a display list storage area for temporarily storing the display list output from the liquid crystal control CPU 150a, a frame buffer area corresponding to the image display device 31, and the like.

This frame buffer area is a storage area for drawing or displaying an image, and further has a first frame buffer area and a second frame buffer area. The first frame buffer area and the second frame buffer area are alternately switched between the "drawing frame buffer" and the "display frame buffer" each time drawing is started.

The drawing control unit 151 is a so-called image processor, and draws the image data stored in the CGROM 152 in the "drawing frame buffer" of the frame buffer area of the VRAM 153 based on the instruction (display list) from the liquid crystal control CPU 150a. Furthermore, the drawing control unit 151 reads image data from the “frame buffer for display” in the frame buffer area. Based on the read image data, a video signal (LVDS signal, RGB signal, etc.) is generated and output to the image display device 31 for display.

The drive control unit 160 is connected to the board driving device 33, and drives the solenoids, motors, etc. in the board driving device 33 based on various performance data transmitted from the performance control unit 120m (sub CPU 120a). control. By driving and controlling the board driving device 33, the first decorative member 33a and the second decorative member 33b provided on the game board 2 are driven.

The lamp control unit 170 is connected to the board lighting device 34a, and controls the lighting of the LEDs and the like in the board lighting device 34a based on various types of performance data transmitted from the performance control unit 120m (sub CPU 120a). conduct. By controlling lighting of the board lighting device 34a, the board lighting device 34a provided on the game board 2 is turned on/off.

The frame control board 180 controls effects of the sound output device 32 provided on the glass frame 50, the frame illumination device 34b, and the effect button 35.

This frame control board 180 is connected to the effect control board 120 and the power supply board 140, and as described above, the communication between the frame control board 180 and the effect control board 120 is configured so that data can be communicated bidirectionally. The frame control board 180 receives power supply voltage from the power supply board 140 .

The frame control board 180 performs control to output predetermined audio data to the audio output device 32 based on various data for effects transmitted from the effect control board 120, and lights LEDs, etc. in the lighting device 34b for the frame. Control is performed, and drive control of the effect button drive motor 35b is performed. Under the control of the frame control board 180, the sound output device 32 provided on the glass frame 50 outputs sound, the lighting device 34b for the frame is turned on and off, and the effect button 35 moves up and down. .

Further, the frame control board 180 transmits the input signal to the effect control board 120 when input signals are input from the effect button detection switch 35a and the cross key detection switch 36b. That is, the effect control board 120 receives input signals from the effect button detection switch 35a and the cross key detection switch 36b through the frame control board 180. FIG.

The payout control board 130 includes a payout control unit 131 for controlling the payout of game balls, and a launch control unit 132 for controlling the launch of game balls.

This payout control board 130 is connected to the main control board 110 and the power supply board 140, and as described above, the communication between the payout control board 130 and the main control board 110 is configured so that data can be communicated bidirectionally. The payout control board 130 receives power supply voltage from the power supply board 140 .

The payout control unit 131 is composed of a one-chip microcomputer including a payout CPU 131a, a payout ROM 131b, and a payout RAM 131c.

The payout CPU 131a reads the program stored in the payout ROM 131b based on input signals from the payout ball counting detection switch 135 for detecting whether or not the game ball has been paid out, the door opening switch 133, and the timer, and performs arithmetic processing. Along with performing the processing, corresponding payout data is transmitted to the main control board 110 based on the processing.

The output side of the payout control board 130 is connected with a payout motor 134 of a payout device for paying out a predetermined number of game balls from the game ball storage section. The payout CPU 131a reads out a predetermined program from the payout ROM 131b based on the payout number designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, performs arithmetic processing, and controls the payout motor 134 of the payout device to produce a predetermined game ball. Pay out. At this time, the payout RAM 131c functions as a data work area during the arithmetic processing of the payout CPU 131a.

The shooting control unit 132 has the input side connected to the touch sensor 3a and the shooting volume 3b, and the output side connected to the shooting solenoid 4a and the ball feeding solenoid 4b. The firing control unit 132 inputs a touch signal from the touch sensor 3a and controls energization of the firing solenoid 4a and the ball feeding solenoid 4b based on the voltage supplied from the firing volume 3b.

The touch sensor 3a is provided inside the operating handle 3, and is composed of a capacitive proximity switch that utilizes a change in electrostatic capacity when the player touches the operating handle 3. FIG. When the touch sensor 3a detects that the player has touched the operating handle 3, it outputs a touch signal to the shooting control section 132 to permit the energization of the shooting solenoid 4a. The shooting control unit 132 is basically configured so as not to shoot the game ball 200 to the game area 6 unless a touch signal is input from the touch sensor 3a.

The firing volume 3b is directly connected to the rotating portion of the operating handle 3, and is composed of a variable resistor. The firing volume 3b divides the constant voltage (for example, 5 V) applied to the firing volume 3b by a variable resistor and supplies the divided voltage to the firing control section 132 (the voltage supplied to the firing control section 132 is variable). The shooting control unit 132 energizes the shooting solenoid 4a based on the voltage divided by the shooting volume 3b, and rotates the hitting member 4c directly connected to the shooting solenoid 4a, thereby causing the game ball 200 to play. Fire in area 6.

The firing solenoid 4a is composed of a rotary solenoid. The firing solenoid 4a is directly connected to the ejection member 4c, and the rotation of the firing solenoid 4a rotates the ejection member 4c.

Here, the rotation speed of the firing solenoid 4a is set to about 99.9 (times/minute) from the frequency based on the output period of the crystal oscillator provided in the firing control section 132. FIG. As a result, the number of shooting games per minute is about 99.9 (pieces/minute) because one shot is shot each time the shooting solenoid makes one rotation. That is, one game ball is shot approximately every 0.6 seconds.

The ball feed solenoid 4b is composed of a linear solenoid, and feeds the game balls in the receiving tray 40 one by one toward the hitting member 4c directly connected to the firing solenoid 4a.

The power supply board 140 has a backup power supply consisting of a capacitor, supplies a power supply voltage to the game machine 1, monitors the power supply voltage supplied to the game machine 1, and when the power supply voltage drops below a predetermined value, A power failure detection signal is output to the main control board 110 . More specifically, when the power failure detection signal goes high, the main CPU 110a becomes operable, and when the power failure detection signal goes low, the main CPU 110a stops operating. The backup power supply is not limited to a capacitor, and may be, for example, a battery, or a combination of a capacitor and a battery.

(Description of game state)
Next, the game state when the game progresses will be described. In this embodiment, it has a "low-probability gaming state" and a "high-probability gaming state" as a state related to the jackpot lottery, and a "non-time-saving gaming state" as a state related to the start movable piece 15b of the second start port 15. It has a "time saving game state". The state (low-probability game state, high-probability game state) related to the jackpot lottery and the state (non-time-saving game state, time-saving game state) related to the starting movable piece 15b can be associated with each other, and can be made independent. can. in short,
(1) "Low probability time-saving gaming state" which is a low-probability gaming state and time-saving gaming state;
(2) "Low probability non-time-saving gaming state" which is a low-probability gaming state and non-time-saving gaming state;
(3) "High probability time-saving gaming state" which is a high probability gaming state and time-saving gaming state;
(4) It is possible to provide a "high probability non-time-saving gaming state" which is a high-probability gaming state and a non-time-saving gaming state.
In addition, the game state when the game is started, that is, the initial game state of the gaming machine 1 is set to the "low probability non-time-saving game state", and this game state is set to the "normal game state" in the present embodiment. I will call it.

In the present embodiment, the "low-probability gaming state" means that in the jackpot lottery performed on the condition that the game ball enters the first start port 14 or the second start port 15, the winning probability of the jackpot is For example, it refers to a game state set as low as 1/300. On the other hand, the "high-probability game state" means a game state in which the probability of winning the jackpot is improved compared to the low-probability game state, and the probability of winning the jackpot is set as high as 1/60, for example. Therefore, in the "high-probability gaming state", it is easier to win the jackpot than in the "low-probability gaming state". The change from the low-probability gaming state to the high-probability gaming state is performed after the end of the jackpot game, which will be described later.

In this embodiment, the "non-time-saving gaming state" means that in the winning lottery executed based on the passage of the game ball to the normal symbol gate 13, the average fluctuation time of the normal symbol corresponding to the lottery result is "time-saving game It is a game state that is set longer than the "state" and tends to set the opening time of the second starting port 15 short when winning is won. For example, when the game ball passes through the normal design gate 13, a winning lottery is performed, and the normal design is variably displayed in the normal design display device 22, but the normal design is 30 seconds, for example, after the variability display is started. Stop display later. Then, when the lottery result is a hit, the second starting port 15 is controlled to be open for 0.2 seconds after the stop display of the normal symbols.

On the other hand, the "time-saving gaming state" means that in the winning lottery executed based on the passage of the game ball to the normal symbol gate 13, the average fluctuation time of the normal symbol corresponding to the lottery result is "non-time-saving game State" and the opening time of the second starting port 15 when winning is, for example, 3 seconds, which is set longer than the "non-time-saving game state". Furthermore, in the "non-time-saving gaming state", the probability of winning in the winning lottery is set as low as 1/16, and in the "time-saving gaming state", the probability of winning in the winning lottery is set as high as 15/16. set. Therefore, in the "time-saving gaming state", when the game ball passes through the normal symbol gate 13, the second starting port 15 is more likely to be controlled to the open state than in the "non-time-saving gaming state". As a result, in the "time-saving gaming state", the player can proceed with the game while suppressing the consumption of game balls.

In addition, in the embodiment, compared to the "non-time-saving gaming state", the "time-saving gaming state" is such that the fluctuation time of the normal pattern, the opening time of the second start port 15, and the winning probability of the winning lottery are advantageous. have set. However, the "time-saving gaming state" may be set so that only one of the variation time of the normal symbols, the opening time of the second starting port 15, and the winning probability of the winning lottery is advantageous.

Next, details of various tables stored in the main ROM 110b will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 12. FIG.

(jackpot determination table for jackpot lottery)
FIG. 5 is a diagram showing a big hit determination table. Specifically, FIG. 5(a) is a jackpot lottery jackpot determination table triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first start port 14, and FIG. It is a jackpot determination table for a jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball. The jackpot probabilities are the same in the tables of FIGS. 5(a) and 5(b).

As shown in FIGS. 5(a) and 5(b), in the jackpot determination table, probability game states, jackpot determination random numbers, and jackpot determination results are associated with each other.

The main CPU 110a refers to the jackpot determination table shown in FIGS. 5(a) and 5(b), and based on the current probability gaming state and the obtained random number value for jackpot determination, determines whether a "jackpot" has occurred. or "losing".

For example, according to the jackpot determination table for the jackpot lottery shown in FIG. 5(a), two random numbers for jackpot determination, "7" and "8", are determined to be jackpots in the low-probability gaming state. On the other hand, in the high-probability gaming state, ten random numbers for judging a big win from "7" to "16" are judged as a big win. If it is a random number value other than the above, it is determined as "losing".

Therefore, since the random number range of the random number for judging a big win is from 0 to 599, the probability of being judged as a big win in the low-probability game state is 1/300, and it is judged as a big win in the high-probability game state. The probability is 1/60, which is five times higher.

(Special design decision table)
FIG. 6 is a diagram showing a special symbol determination table for determining the types of special symbols to be stopped and displayed as a result of variable display. Specifically, FIG. 6(a) is a special symbol determination table for losing, and FIG. 6(b) is a special symbol determination table for big hits.

As shown in FIG. 6(a), in the special symbol determination table for losing, the type of the special symbol display device, and when the game ball enters the first start port 14 or the second start port 15, it is acquired. A random number value for determining a special symbol and a losing special symbol (stop special symbol data) are associated with each other. In addition, a plurality of losing special symbols may be associated with the special symbol determination random number so that a plurality of special symbols can be determined even in the case of losing.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 6(b), the special symbol determination table for the big hit includes the type of the special symbol display device (the type of the starting port where the game ball has won), the first starting port 14, or the second starting A special symbol determination random number obtained when a game ball enters the mouth 15 is associated with a jackpot special symbol (stop special symbol data).

The main CPU 110a refers to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 6, and determines the type of special symbol (stop special symbol data) based on the type of the special symbol display device, the random number value for special symbol determination, and the like.

Then, when the special symbols start to fluctuate, based on the determined special symbol type (stop special symbol data), the performance symbol designation command as the special symbol information is determined. Here, one command of the performance pattern designation command is composed of 2-byte data, 1-byte MODE data for identifying the classification of the control command, and 1-byte DATA indicating the content of the control command to be executed. data. This also applies to a variation pattern specification command and the like, which will be described later.

Here, as will be described later, the game state after the end of the jackpot game (see FIG. 7) and the jackpot game type (see FIG. 8) are determined by the type of special symbol (stop special symbol data). , It can be said that the type of special symbol determines the game state after the end of the jackpot game and the type of jackpot game. Therefore, in the column of special symbols in FIG. 6(b), explanations corresponding to the types of jackpot games are additionally described.

(Setting data table at the end of jackpot game)
FIG. 7 is a setting data table at the end of the jackpot game for determining the game state after the jackpot game is finished.

As shown in FIG. 7, the setting data table at the end of the jackpot game includes stop special figure data of special symbols, game state buffer, time saving game state, time saving game number (J), probability game state, high probability It is associated with the number of games played (X).

Here, the "game state buffer" is information indicating the game state when the jackpot is won. The game state is composed of a combination of a time-saving game state (or a non-time-saving game state) and a high-probability game state (or a low-probability game state).

Specifically, if the game state buffer is "00H", it indicates the game state information of the low-probability game state and non-time-saving game state in which both the time-saving game flag and the high-probability game flag are not set. If the game state buffer is "01H", the time saving game flag is not set but the high probability game flag is set, indicating the game state information of the high probability game state and non-time saving game state. If the game state buffer is "02H", it indicates the game state information of the low probability game state and the time reduction game state in which the time saving game flag is set but the high probability game flag is not set. If the game state buffer is "03H", it indicates the game state information of the high probability game state and the time reduction game state in which both the time saving game flag and the high probability game flag are set.

The main CPU 110a refers to the setting data table at the end of the jackpot game shown in FIG. 7, and based on the stop special figure data of the special symbols and the game status buffer, the time saving game state, the number of time saving games (J), and the probability. A game state and the number of high-probability games (X) are determined.

As a feature of the setting data table at the end of the jackpot game shown in FIG. 7 in this embodiment, it is configured to determine a high probability game state until the jackpot lottery is performed 80 times after all the jackpot games are finished. .

Furthermore, as a feature of the setting data table at the end of the jackpot game shown in FIG. 7, even if the stop special figure data of the same special symbol, , It is possible to change the setting of the time saving game flag and the number of time saving games (J).

For example, when the stop special figure data of the special symbol is the stop special figure data 04 (special symbol 4), the time saving game flag and, regarding the time saving game number (J), in the game state buffer low probability game state and non-time saving If the game state information (00H) indicating the game state is stored, the time saving game flag is not set after the jackpot is completed, and the number of time saving games (J) is also set to 0 times. On the other hand, if the game state information (02H, 03H, or 04H) other than the above is stored in the game state buffer, the time saving game flag is set after the jackpot game ends, and the number of times of time saving game (J). is set to 80 times.

As a result, the number of time-saving games (J) can be changed according to the game state when the big win is won, and the player can be interested in the game state when the big win is won.

(Special electric accessory operation mode determination table)
FIG. 8 is a special electric accessary product operating mode determination table for determining the big winning hole opening mode table. As will be described later, since the big winning game is executed based on this big winning opening opening mode table, it can be said that the big winning opening opening mode table indicates the type of the big winning game. In the present embodiment, the term "table" will be omitted as appropriate and described as "TBL".

As shown in FIG. 8, the special electric accessary product operating mode determination table is associated with the stop special figure data of the special symbols and the big winning opening mode table.

The main CPU 110a refers to the special electric accessory operation mode determination table shown in FIG. 8, and determines the big winning opening opening mode table based on the stop special figure data of the special symbols.

(Grand prize opening mode table)
FIG. 9 is a diagram showing the configuration of the large winning opening opening/closing mode table determined in FIG. is determined.

More specifically, it is a group of big winning opening mode determination tables for big winning that are referred to during a big winning game, and is composed of a first big winning table, a second big winning table, a third big winning table, and a fourth big winning table. It is

In the big winning hole opening mode determination table shown in FIG. 9, the type of big winning hole to be opened (first big winning hole 16 or second big winning hole 17) and the maximum number of round games in one big winning game , a specified number indicating the maximum number of prizes to be won in one round, the opening time from the start of the jackpot game to the execution of the first round game, and the maximum number of times the big prize opening is opened in each round game. , one opening time of the big winning slot in each round game, one closing time of the big winning slot in each round game, an interval time until the next round game is executed, and the end of the last round game. to the end of the jackpot game are associated with each other.

The main CPU 110a executes a first jackpot game based on a first jackpot table, a second jackpot game based on a second jackpot table, a third jackpot game based on a third jackpot table, and a third jackpot game based on a third jackpot table. A fourth jackpot game is executed based on the four jackpot table.

According to the first big winning table shown in FIG. 9, the first big winning opening/closing door 16b is operated to open the first big winning opening 16 on the right side of the game area 6 for up to 29 seconds per round. A first jackpot game can be executed. However, if the specified number (nine) of game balls wins the first big winning hole 16 before the opening time elapses for 29 seconds, one round of the game ends. Then, when the 16-round game ends, the first jackpot game ends.

Further, according to the second jackpot table shown in FIG. 9, the second big prize winning opening/closing door 17b is operated to open and close the second big winning opening 17 a plurality of times (K=3) for one round. (the second big winning port 17 repeats opening for 3 seconds and closing for 1 second) can be executed. However, if the specified number (nine) of game balls wins the second prize-winning opening 17 before reaching the maximum number of openings, one round of the game ends. Then, when the 4-round game ends, the second jackpot game ends.

The third jackpot table shown in FIG. 9 has data set in the same manner as the third jackpot table, but differs from the third jackpot table in that the maximum number of round games is set larger. . Therefore, the third jackpot game becomes a jackpot game more advantageous than the second jackpot game.

According to the fourth jackpot table shown in FIG. 9, by operating the first big winning gate opening/closing door 16b, the first big winning gate 16 on the right side of the game area 6 can be opened up to 0 for two rounds (twice). It is possible to execute a fourth jackpot game that opens for 0.052 seconds. However, if the specified number (nine) of game balls enter the first big winning hole 16 before the opening time of 0.052 seconds elapses, one round of the game ends. Then, when the second round game ends, the fourth jackpot game ends.

Thus, in the present embodiment, there are provided four types of "jackpot games (special games)" from the first jackpot game to the fourth jackpot game in which the big win opening to be opened and the operation of opening the big win opening are different. Therefore, players can enjoy various special games.

In addition, since the opening time of the fourth jackpot game (0.052 seconds) is shorter than the time (about 0.6 seconds) in which one game ball is shot as described above, the first big winning opening/closing door 16b Even if is activated, it is difficult to enter the first big prize winning port 16. - 特許庁Therefore, it can be said that the fourth jackpot game is a "disadvantageous release mode". On the other hand, the opening time of the first jackpot game (29 seconds) and the opening time of the second and third jackpot games (3 seconds) are longer than the time for one game ball to be shot (about 0.6 seconds), It can be said to be an "advantageous mode of opening".

(Special figure variation pattern determination table)
FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a special figure variation pattern determination table for determining a special symbol variation pattern (variation time, etc.) as will be described later. In addition, FIG. 10 is, for example, a special figure variation pattern determination table that is referred to in a low probability non-time-saving gaming state, and a special figure variation pattern determination table that is also referred to in a high probability time-saving gaming state (not shown) ( "DATA" in the variation pattern designation command is "51H" to "61H"), etc. are stored in the main ROM 110b.

As shown in FIG. 10, the special symbol variation pattern determination table includes a special symbol display device (type of starting port), a jackpot determination result, a special symbol (stop special symbol data), a random value for reach determination, and a special symbol The number of reservations (U1 or U2), the random number for special symbol fluctuation, the special symbol variation pattern, and the special symbol variation time are associated with each other.

Therefore, it can be said that the "variation pattern of the special symbol" defines at least the determination result of the big hit and the variation time of the special symbol. In addition, when a big win is made, the ready-to-win game is always performed. It should be noted that the reach determination random number, the random number range is set to 97 (0-96), the special figure fluctuation random number, the random number range is set to 100 (0-99).

In addition, in the special symbol variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 10, the variation pattern (1) (normal variation ) is set to be shorter than the variation time (T1) of the variation pattern (2) (shortened variation). For example, the variation time (T1) of variation pattern (1) (normal variation) is set to 12 seconds, and the variation time (T2) of variation pattern (2) (shortened variation) is set to 3 seconds. Although the maximum number of balls "4" may be stored as the reserved number of special symbols, the variation pattern of the special symbols is determined after subtracting 1 from the reserved number of special symbols. Therefore, "4" will not be referenced as the pending number.

The main CPU 110a refers to the special symbol variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 10, the special symbol display device (type of starting port), the lottery result of the jackpot lottery, the special symbol to be stopped, the number of reserved special symbols (U1 or U2). ), the random number for reach determination, and the random number for special figure variation, the variation pattern of the special symbol and the variation time of the special symbol are determined.

Then, based on the determined special symbol variation pattern, a special symbol variation pattern designation command is generated, and information on the special symbol variation pattern is transmitted to the effect control board 120 .

Here, the special symbol variation pattern designation command is composed of 1-byte MODE data for identifying the command classification and 1-byte DATA data indicating the content (function) of the command. In this embodiment, when the MODE data is "E6H", the special symbol variation pattern designation command of the first special symbol display device 20 corresponding to the winning of the game ball in the first start port 14 is indicated, and the MODE data is When it is "E7H", it indicates the special symbol variation pattern designation command of the second special symbol display device 21 corresponding to the game ball winning in the second starting port 15. - 特許庁

Further, in the effect control board 120, as will be described later, the contents of the effect such as the effect pattern 38 are determined based on the variation pattern of the special symbol (variation pattern designation command). In the rightmost column of the special figure variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 10, the contents of the effect such as the effect pattern 38 are described as a reference.

Here, "normal fluctuation" and "shortened fluctuation" as the contents of the production mean that the plurality of production patterns 38 fluctuate at high speed and stop without reaching reach. The shortened variation is different in that the shortened variation ends in a shorter variation time than the normal variation.

In addition, "ready-to-win" is a variation mode that gives the player a sense of anticipation of a big win, such as a part of the combination of the performance symbols 38 that informs the big win is temporarily stopped, and the other performance symbols 38 fluctuate. means For example, when the combination of the three-digit performance symbols 38 of ``777'' is set as the combination of the performance symbols 38 for notifying a big hit, the two performance symbols 38 are temporarily stopped at ``7'', and the remaining performance is performed. It refers to a mode in which the pattern 38 is changing. The term "temporary stop" refers to a mode in which the performance pattern 38 shakes slightly or is slightly deformed to give the player the impression that the performance pattern 38 is stopped.

Also, "normal reach" means a reach with a low expectation (hereinafter referred to as "big hit expectation") for executing a jackpot game in which two performance symbols 38 are temporarily stopped and the remaining one performance symbol 38 fluctuates. is doing. In this embodiment, the "normal reach" does not result in a big hit, but the "normal reach" may be configured to result in a big win.
In addition, "SP reach" means super reach, which has higher expectations for big hits than normal reach. For example, it refers to a mode in which the effect pattern 38 that is not temporarily stopped makes a special change or a special character is displayed.
Further, "SPSP reach" means a special reach that is performed after the super reach and has a higher degree of expectation for a big hit than the super reach.
In addition, "full rotation reach" means a state in which all the combinations of a plurality of performance symbols 38 for informing a big win change at a low speed. Represents the reach performed.

In addition, the "pseudo consecutive number of times" means "the number of times the pseudo continuous notice is executed", and the "pseudo continuous notice" is the effect It means an advance notice by a variation mode in which the pattern 38 is temporarily stopped and then changed again, and the performance pattern 38 is changed and temporarily stopped a plurality of times.

(Preliminary judgment table for jackpot lottery)
FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a pre-determination table for pre-determining the result of the jackpot lottery. In addition, the pre-determination table of FIG. 11 is a pre-determination table referred to in the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state, and the table referred to in the high-probability time-saving gaming state is separately stored in the main ROM 110b.

As shown in FIG. 11, the preliminary determination table includes a special symbol display device (type of starting port), a random number for judging a big hit, a random number for determining a special symbol, a random number for judging reach, and a random number for special figure fluctuation. Numerical values are associated with planned fluctuation patterns.

Here, it is possible to determine in advance whether it is a "jackpot" or "losing" by the big hit determination random number acquired when the game ball enters the starting hole, and the type of special symbol (jackpot) can be determined by the special symbol determination random number Special design, loss special design) can be determined in advance.
In addition, since the random number for reach determination and the random number for special figure fluctuation can be determined in advance, the scheduled variation pattern (whether or not reach occurs, the type of reach, etc.) can be determined in advance. It is possible to include the types of jackpots and scheduled variation patterns.

The main CPU 110a refers to the preliminary determination table shown in FIG. 11, special symbol display device (type of starting port), random number for big hit determination, random number for special symbol determination, random number for reach determination, and special symbol variation. A planned variation pattern is determined based on the random number. Then, a start opening winning designation command is generated according to the determined scheduled variation pattern.

This starting point winning designation command is composed of 1-byte MODE data for identifying the command classification and 1-byte DATA data indicating the content (function) of the command. In this embodiment, when the MODE data is "E8H", the starting opening winning designation command corresponding to the winning of the game ball in the first starting opening 14 is indicated, and when the MODE data is "E9H", the second starting It shows the starting opening winning designation command corresponding to the winning of the game ball in the opening 15. - 特許庁

In addition, the prior determination table shown in FIG. 11 is similar to the special figure variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. However, while the advance determination table shown in FIG. 11 is used when the game ball enters the starting port, the special figure variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 10 is used when the special symbol starts to vary. there is In addition, there is also a difference in whether or not to refer to the "holding number".
Therefore, in the advance determination table shown in FIG. 11, it is possible to discriminate the type of jackpot and reach, but it is impossible to discriminate only between "normal fluctuation" and "shortening fluctuation"(" Planned fluctuation pattern”).

The pre-determination table shown in FIG. 11 is a pre-determination table for the big win lottery referred to in the low probability gaming state, but although not shown, the pre-determination table for the big win lottery referred to in the high probability gaming state is also included. It is stored in the main ROM 110b.
The jackpot lottery pre-determination table referred to in the high-probability gaming state has the same configuration as the pre-determination table shown in FIG. The value of the random number for judging the jackpot is different.

FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a table relating to normal symbols and the starting movable piece 15b of the second starting port 15. As shown in FIG. Specifically, FIG. 12(a) is a diagram showing a winning determination table for a winning lottery, and FIG. It is a figure which shows a design determination table. In addition, FIG. 12(c) is a normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination table for determining the fluctuation time of the normal pattern, and FIG. It is a figure which shows the starting port opening mode determination table for determining.

(Hit determination table for winning lottery)
As shown in FIG. 12A, in the hit determination table, presence/absence of the time-saving game state, random numbers for hit determination, and hit determination results are associated with each other.

The main CPU 110a refers to the win determination table shown in FIG. 12(a), and determines whether it is a “win” or a “lose” based on the current time-saving gaming state and the acquired random number value for win determination. judge. For example, according to the hit determination table shown in FIG. 12(a), when it is in the non-time-saving gaming state, one specific hit determination random value of "0" is determined to be hit. On the other hand, when it is in the time-saving game state, 15 hit determination random numbers from "0" to "14" are determined as hits. If it is a random number value other than the above, it is determined as "losing". Therefore, since the random number range of the hit determination random number is 0 to 15, the probability of being determined to be a hit in the non-time-saving gaming state is 1/16, and the probability of being determined to be a hit in the time-saving gaming state is 15. /16.

(Normal design decision table)
As shown in FIG. 12(b), in the normal symbol determination table, presence/absence of the time-saving gaming state, hit determination results, normal symbol determination random numbers, and normal symbols (stop normal symbol data) are associated with each other. there is

The main CPU 110a refers to the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 12(b), and based on the current time-saving game state, the hit determination result, and the obtained random number value for normal symbol determination, the normal symbols to be stopped and displayed. Determine (stop normal map data).

Then, at the time of starting the variation of the normal symbols, the main CPU 110a determines the normal pattern designation command as information of the normal symbols based on the determined normal symbol type (stop normal pattern data), and determines the normal pattern designation command. is transmitted to the effect control board 120 .

Here, as shown in FIG. 12(d), the opening mode of the starting movable piece 15b is determined by the normal pattern (stop normal pattern data). It can be said that it is decided.

(Normal figure fluctuation pattern decision table)
FIG. 12(c) is a diagram showing a normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination table for determining a normal pattern fluctuation pattern (variation time, etc.) as will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 12(c), the normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination table is associated with the presence or absence of a time-saving gaming state, the winning lottery lottery result, the random number for normal pattern fluctuation, and the normal pattern fluctuation time. ing.

The main CPU 110a refers to the normal pattern variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. Determine the time of variation.

Then, at the time of starting the variation of the normal symbols, the main CPU 110a determines the normal symbol variation designation command as the information of the normal symbol variation time based on the determined normal symbol variation time, and determines the normal symbol variation designation command. is transmitted to the effect control board 120 .

As a feature of the normal figure fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 12 (c), the fluctuation time of the time saving game state (3 seconds or 5 seconds) is the fluctuation time of the non-time saving game state (30 seconds or 40 seconds) designed to be shorter than

(Determination table for starting opening mode of starting movable piece)
As shown in FIG. 12(d), the start opening mode determination table includes stop normal pattern data (normal pattern), maximum number of openings of start movable piece 15b, opening time of auxiliary game, and second start opening 15. The opening time, the interval time, and the ending time of the auxiliary game are associated with each other.

The main CPU 110a refers to the starting port opening mode determination table shown in FIG. Determine the ending time.

In this embodiment, in the starting port opening mode determination table shown in FIG. 12(d), the starting port opening mode based on the stop normal map data = 02 is more advantageous than the starting port opening mode based on the stop normal map data = 01 It is an open mode, and the starting port opening mode based on the stop normal map data = 03 is an opening mode more advantageous than the starting port opening mode based on the stop normal map data = 02.

Then, as shown in the normal symbol determination table of FIG. 12(b), the stop normal symbol data=03, which is the most advantageous release mode, is selected when winning is achieved in the time-saving game state. As a result, in the time-saving game state, the start movable piece 15b operates more advantageously for the player than in the non-time-saving game state.

(Various storage areas)
FIG. 13 is a diagram showing various storage areas set in the main RAM 110c. Specifically, FIG. 13(a) shows special symbol determination information (random number for judging a big hit, special symbol determination Random number, random number for reach determination, random number for special figure fluctuation) is a diagram showing a special figure determination information storage area, and FIG. It is a diagram showing the configuration, FIG. 13 (c) is normal pattern determination information acquired when the game ball passes through the normal pattern gate 13 (random number for hit determination, random value for normal pattern determination, normal pattern fluctuation random number) is stored, and FIG. 13(d) is a diagram showing the configuration of each storage unit of the normal pattern determination information storage area.

As shown in FIG. 13(a), the special figure determination information storage area stores special figure determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 14. First special figure determination information reservation storage A second special figure determination information holding storage area in which special figure determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the second start port 15 is stored, and a special figure determination information during execution of the variable display is stored. The first special figure determination information holding storage area and the second special figure determination information holding storage area are divided from the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit, respectively. there is

In addition, the number of undetermined special figure determination information stored in the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit of the first special figure determination information reservation storage area is the first special design reservation number (U1), and these undetermined The number of pending icons corresponding to the special figure determination information is displayed in the first pending icon display area 31a, and the number of undetermined special figure determination information stored in the second special figure determination information holding storage area is the second special symbol The number of pending (U2), the number of pending icons corresponding to these undetermined special figure determination information is displayed in the second pending icon display area 31b, and the variable display (variable effect) stored in the special figure execution storage area is displayed. The variation icon corresponding to the special figure determination information being executed is displayed in the variation icon display area 31c.

As shown in FIG. 13(b), each storage unit includes a jackpot determination random number storage area for storing a jackpot determination random number value and a special symbol determination random number area for storing a special symbol determination random number value. It is divided into a numerical value storage area, a reach determination random number storage area for storing reach determination random number values, and a special figure variation random number storage area for storing special figure variation random number values.

Then, when the game ball enters the first start port 14 and the special figure determination information is acquired, the special figure determination information is included in the first to fourth storage units of the first special figure determination information holding storage area The acquired special figure determination information is stored in the storage unit with the smallest number that is not stored. Also, when the game ball enters the second start port 15 and the special figure determination information is acquired, the special figure determination information is included in the first to fourth storage units of the second special figure determination information holding storage area The acquired special figure determination information is stored in the storage unit with the smallest number that is not stored.

In the special figure execution storage area, when the condition for starting the variable display of the first special symbol is satisfied, the special figure determination information stored in the first storage of the first special figure determination information holding storage area is shifted, and the first special It is referred to execute variable display of symbols. Further, when the condition for starting the variable display of the second special symbol is satisfied, the special symbol determination information stored in the first storage part of the second special symbol determination information holding storage area is shifted, and the variable display of the second special symbol is performed. is referenced to perform

As shown in FIG. 13(c), the normal pattern determination information storage area is a normal pattern determination information holding storage area in which the normal pattern determination information acquired based on the passage of the game ball to the normal pattern gate 13 is stored, It is composed of a general pattern execution storage area in which the general pattern determination information during execution of the variable display is stored, and the general pattern determination information holding storage area is divided from the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit. In addition, the number of undetermined general pattern determination information stored in the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit of the general pattern determination information retention storage area is the number of normal pattern retention (G).

As shown in FIG. 13(d), each storage unit includes a hit determination random number storage area for storing a hit determination random number, and a normal symbol determination random number for storing a normal symbol determination random number. It is divided into a numerical value storage area and a random number storage area for normal figure fluctuation for storing random numbers for normal figure fluctuation. Then, when the game ball passes through the normal pattern gate 13 and the normal pattern determination information is acquired, the normal pattern determination information is not stored in the first to fourth storage units of the normal pattern determination information holding storage area. The acquired general pattern determination information is stored in the storage unit with the smallest number.

In the normal pattern execution storage area, when the starting condition for the variable display of the normal pattern is established, the normal pattern determination information stored in the first storage part of the normal pattern determination information holding storage area is shifted, and the normal pattern variable display is performed. Referenced to run.

Next, the progress of a game in the gaming machine 1 will be explained using a flowchart.

(main processing of the main control board)
Main processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing main processing in the main control board 110 .

When power is supplied from the power supply board 140, a system reset occurs in the main CPU 110a, and the main CPU 110a performs the following main processing.

First, the main CPU 110a performs an initialization process consisting of steps S1 to S15. Specifically, the main CPU 110a permits access to the main RAM 110c in step S1.

In step S2, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a backup flag indicating power recovery is set in the main RAM 110c. If the backup flag is set, the process moves to step S3, and if the backup flag is not set, the process moves to step S12.

In step S3, the main CPU 110a calculates the checksum of the main RAM 110c. In step S4, the main CPU 110a compares the checksum stored in the main RAM 110c at the time of the previous power failure with the newly calculated checksum. It determines whether it is normal or not. If the checksum is normal, the process proceeds to step S6, and if the checksum is not normal, it is assumed that there is an abnormality in the data stored in the RAM 110c (the control state before the power failure cannot be normally restored). , the process proceeds to step S12.

In step S6, the main CPU 110a determines whether the RAM clear switch 111a is ON. If the RAM clear switch 111a is not turned on, the process proceeds to step S7 assuming that the process at the time of power restoration is to be performed. The process is moved to S13.

In step S7, the main CPU 110a clears the backup flag and checksum stored in the main RAM 110c, and sets the RAM when power is restored. By performing this processing, the state of progress (control state) of the game returns (restores) to the state before the power was cut off, so the game can be restarted from the state before the power was cut off.

In step S8, the main CPU 110a initializes the devices around the CPU. Specifically, the output setting to the production control board 120, the setting of the CTC (Counter Timer Circuit) to be used, the interrupt timer (4 milliseconds) of the CTC to be used, and the like are set.

In step S9, the main CPU 110a sets a power recovery designation command indicating that the game control state has been restored and the game state before the power failure occurred in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and proceeds to step S20. Transfer. As a result, the power restoration designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 120, and the effect control board 120 performs the process for executing the power restoration notification.

Note that the power restoration notification means that the image display device 31 displays a power restoration screen (image) indicating that the power has been restored, or the audio output device 32 outputs a power restoration notification sound indicating that the power has been restored. It is to do.

It should be noted that the information indicating the current game state may not be included in the power restoration designation command, and the game state designation command indicating the current game state may be transmitted before or after the power restoration designation command is transmitted.

In step S10, the main CPU 110a sets a special symbol storage specification command indicating the first special symbol reserved number (U1) and the second special symbol reserved number (U2) in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the special symbol memory specification command is transmitted to the effect control board 120, and the effect control board 120 can grasp the number of special symbol reservations, and the image display device 31 displays the first reservation icon and the second reservation icon. will be processed to display.

In step S11, the main CPU 110a sets a normal symbol storage specifying command indicating the number of normal symbol reservations (G) in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the normal symbol memory specification command is transmitted to the effect control board 120, and the effect control board 120 can grasp the normal symbol memory number.

In step S12, the main CPU 110a clears all areas of the main RAM 110c, sets the RAM when the power is turned on, and shifts the process to step S14.

In step S13, the main CPU 110a clears the used area of the main RAM 110c, sets the RAM when the power is turned on, and shifts the process to step S14. By performing this process, the progress state (control state) of the game is initialized to the initial state.

In step S14, the main CPU 110a initializes the devices around the CPU. Specifically, the output setting to the production control board 120, the setting of the CTC (Counter Timer Circuit) to be used, the interrupt timer (4 milliseconds) of the CTC to be used, and the like are set.

In step S15, the main CPU 110a sets a power-on designation command indicating that the game control state has been initialized (RAM cleared) in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and shifts the process to step S20. As a result, the power-on designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 120, and the process for executing the power-on notification is performed by the effect control board 120. - 特許庁

The power-on notification means that the image display device 31 displays a power-on screen (image) indicating that the power is turned on, or the RAM clear notification from the audio output device 32 indicates that the main RAM 110c has been initialized. It is to output sound.

In step S20, the main CPU 110a performs a process of updating the reach determination random number value for determining the special symbol variation pattern (variation time) and the special symbol variation random number value. The initial random number, the initial random number for special symbol determination, the initial random number for hit determination, and the initial random number for normal symbol determination are updated.

In step S31, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a power failure has occurred. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a power failure detection signal has been input from a power failure detection circuit provided on the power supply substrate 140 . If power failure has occurred, the process proceeds to step S32, and if power failure has not occurred, the process proceeds to step S20 so that the process loops.

The main CPU 110a prohibits the timer interrupt in step S32, clears the output port in step S33, calculates the checksum of the main RAM 110c in step S34 and sets it in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, and sets it in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c in step S35. In step S36, a backup flag to be referred to when recovering from power failure is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c. In step S36, access to the main RAM 110c is prohibited, and the system waits until the supply of power supply voltage is completely cut off.

When the power is turned off and when the power is turned on, the checksum of all the used areas of the main RAM 110c is calculated and compared. A sum may be calculated and compared.

(Timer interrupt processing of the main control board)
Timer interrupt processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing in the main control board 110 .

A reset clock pulse generation circuit provided on the main control board 110 generates a clock pulse every predetermined period (4 milliseconds), thereby executing timer interrupt processing described below.

First, in step S100, the main CPU 110a saves the information stored in the register of the main CPU 110a to the stack area.

The main CPU 110a performs time control processing in step S110. Specifically, the update process of the special symbol time counter, the update process of the special game timer counter such as the opening time of the special electric accessory, the update process of the normal symbol time counter, the update process of the opening and closing time of the starting movable piece 15b, etc. update (decrease by 1) the various timer counters.

The main CPU 110a performs random number update processing in step S120. Specifically, a process of updating the random number for judging the big hit, the random number for determining the special symbol, the random number for judging the hit, the random number for determining the normal symbol, and the random number for the normal figure fluctuation is performed. More specifically, each random number value and random number counter are incremented by one. When the added random number counter exceeds the maximum value of the random number range (when the random number counter completes one cycle), the random number counter is reset to 0, and each random number is newly updated from the initial random number at that time. .

The main CPU 110a performs initial random value update processing in step S130. Specifically, a process of updating (adding 1 to) the initial random number value for big hit determination, the initial random number value for special symbol determination, the initial random number value for hit determination, and the initial random number value for normal symbol determination is performed.

The main CPU 110a performs input control processing in step S200. Specifically, the general winning opening detection switch 12a, the first big winning opening detection switch 16a, the second big winning opening detection switch 17a, the first start opening detection switch 14a, the second start opening detection switch 15a, and the gate detection switch 13a. It is determined whether or not there is an input to the various switches, and if there is an input, a process of setting predetermined data is performed. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

The main CPU 110a performs a special figure special electric control process in step S300. Specifically, it performs a process of controlling the jackpot lottery, the variable display of special symbols, the opening and closing of the first big winning hole 16 or the second big winning hole 17, the change of the game state, and the like. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S400, the main CPU 110a performs normal/universal electric power control processing. Specifically, processing for controlling winning lottery, variable display of normal symbols, opening and closing of the starting movable piece 15b, and the like is performed. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

The main CPU 110a performs payout control processing in step S500. Specifically, each winning ball counter is referred to, a payout number specifying command corresponding to each winning hole is generated and set in the transmission buffer of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the payout number designation command is transmitted to the payout control board 130, and the process for paying out the number of game balls corresponding to the payout number designation command from the payout device is performed.

The main CPU 110a performs game progress data creation processing in step S600. Specifically, the external information signal output from the game information output terminal plate 30, the driving data of the starting opening opening/closing solenoid 15c, the driving data of the first large winning opening opening/closing solenoid 16c, the driving data of the second large winning opening opening/closing solenoid 17c. , display data of the first special design display device 20, display data of the second special design display device 21, display data of the normal design display device 22, display data of the first special design reservation display device 23, second special design reservation display A process of creating output data relating to game progress such as display data of the device 24 and display data of the normal symbol reservation display device 25 is performed.

The main CPU 110a performs output control processing in step S700. Specifically, processing for outputting the external information signal, various drive data, and various display data created in steps S600 and S660 is performed. In addition, processing for transmitting commands set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c and the transmission buffer to the effect control board 120 and the payout control board 130 is also performed.

In step S800, the main CPU 110a restores the information saved in step S100 to the register of the main CPU 110a.

(Input control processing of the main control board)
Input control processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing input control processing in the main control board 110 .

In step S210, the main CPU 110a performs general winning hole detection switch input processing. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a detection signal has been input from the general winning opening detection switch 12a, and if the detection signal has been input, a process of adding 1 to the winning ball counter for the general winning opening is performed.

In step S220, the main CPU 110a performs a big winning opening detection switch input process. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a detection signal has been input from the first large winning opening detection switch 16a or the second large winning opening detection switch 17a, and if the detection signal has been input, the detection signal for the large winning opening is detected. A process of adding 1 to the winning ball counter is performed.

In step S230, the main CPU 110a performs a first starting port detection switch input process. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a detection signal has been input from the first start opening detection switch 14a, and when the detection signal is input, 1 is added to the prize ball counter for the first start opening, and the first special If the number of reserved symbols (U1) is less than 4, the first special reserved number of symbols (U1) is added by 1, and the special figure determination information is acquired to obtain a predetermined storage unit of the special figure determination information storage area (first When stored in the storage section to the fourth storage section), processing is performed. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S240, the main CPU 110a performs a second start opening detection switch input process. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the detection signal from the second starting port detection switch 15a is input, and when the detection signal is input, the prize ball counter for the second starting port is incremented by 1, and the second If the special symbol reservation number (U2) is less than 4, the second special symbol reservation number (U2) is added by 1, and the special figure determination information is acquired to obtain the special figure determination information storage area. storage section to fourth storage section). Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S250, the main CPU 110a performs gate detection switch input processing, and terminates the current input control processing. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a detection signal is input from the gate detection switch 13a, and if the normal design reservation number (G) is less than 4 when the detection signal is input, the normal design reservation number (G) is Along with adding 1, perform processing to acquire the general pattern determination information and store it in a predetermined storage unit (first storage unit to fourth storage unit) of the general pattern determination information storage area.

(Input processing of the first start opening detection switch of the main control board)
The first starting opening detection switch input processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 17 . FIG. 17 is a flow chart showing the first starting port detection switch input processing in the main control board 110. As shown in FIG.

First, in step S230-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a detection signal has been input from the first starting port detection switch 14a. If the detection signal is input, the process proceeds to step S230-2, and if the detection signal is not input, the current first starting port detection switch input process is terminated.

In step S230-2, the main CPU 110a performs a process of adding 1 to the prize ball counter (three prize ball counter) for the first starting port used for prize balls and updating it.

The main CPU 110a determines whether or not the first special symbol reservation number (U1) is less than 4 in step S230-3. When the first special symbol reservation number (U1) is less than 4, the process is moved to step S230-4, and when the first special symbol reservation number (U1) is not less than 4, the first start opening detection switch of this time End input processing.

The main CPU 110a adds "1" to the first reserved special symbol number (U1) and stores it in step S230-4, and stores the special symbol indicating the first reserved special symbol number (U1) in step S230-5. The designated command is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the special symbol storage specification command is transmitted to the effect control board 120, and processing such as displaying the first pending icon on the image display device 31 can be performed.

In step S230-6, the main CPU 110a acquires the special figure determination information and sequentially searches for an empty storage unit from the first storage unit in the first special figure determination information storage area. Stores the acquired special figure determination information.

The main CPU 110a performs preliminary determination processing in step S230-7. Specifically, referring to the jackpot lottery pre-determination table shown in FIG. 11, the type of special symbol display device, the random number value for determining the jackpot acquired this time, the random number value for determining the special symbol, the random number value for reach determination, and Perform processing to determine the scheduled variation pattern based on the random number for special figure variation.

In step S230-8, the main CPU 110a sets a start-up winning designation command indicating the scheduled variation pattern determined in the preliminary determination process in step S230-7 in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. 1 End the starting port detection switch input processing.

As a result, the starting opening winning designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 120, and before the variable display of the special symbol triggered by the winning of the game ball to the first starting opening 14 this time (1, or Over the variable display of a plurality of special symbols, it is possible to execute a look-ahead performance that foretells the possibility of execution of the big win game (makes the player expect the execution of the big win game).

(Processing for inputting the second start opening detection switch on the main control board)
The second start opening detection switch input processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is a flow chart showing the second starting opening detection switch input process in the main control board 110. As shown in FIG.

First, in step S240-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a detection signal has been input from the second starting port detection switch 15a. If the detection signal has been input, the process proceeds to step S240-2, and if the detection signal has not been input, the current second starting port detection switch input process is terminated.

In step S240-2, the main CPU 110a performs a process of adding 1 to the prize ball counter (one prize ball counter) for the second starting hole used for prize balls and updating it.

In step S240-3, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the auxiliary game is currently being played. If not during the auxiliary game, the process proceeds to step S240-5, and if during the auxiliary game, in step S240-4, 1 is added to the second starting opening winning ball counter (D) and updated.

The main CPU 110a determines whether or not the second special symbol pending number (U2) is less than 4 in step S240-5. When the second special symbol reservation number (U2) is less than 4, the process is moved to step S240-6, and when the second special symbol reservation number (U2) is not less than 4, this second start opening detection switch End input processing.

The main CPU 110a adds "1" to the second special symbol reserved number (U2) in step S240-6 and stores it, and in step S240-7 special symbol storage indicating the second special symbol reserved number (U2). The designated command is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the special symbol storage specification command is transmitted to the effect control board 120, and processing such as displaying the second pending icon on the image display device 31 can be performed.

In step S240-8, the main CPU 110a acquires the special figure determination information and sequentially searches for an empty storage unit from the first storage unit in the second special figure determination information storage area. Stores the acquired special figure determination information.

The main CPU 110a performs preliminary determination processing in step S240-9. Specifically, referring to the jackpot lottery pre-determination table shown in FIG. 11, the type of special symbol display device, the random number value for determining the jackpot acquired this time, the random number value for determining the special symbol, the random number value for reach determination, and Perform processing to determine the scheduled variation pattern based on the random number for special figure variation.

In step S240-10, the main CPU 110a sets a start-up winning designation command indicating the scheduled variation pattern determined in the preliminary determination process in step S240-9 in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and sets the command in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. 2 End the starting port detection switch input processing.

As a result, the starting opening winning designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 120, and before the variable display of the special symbol triggered by the winning of the game ball to the second starting opening 15 is started (1, or Over the variable display of a plurality of special symbols, it is possible to execute a look-ahead performance that foretells the possibility of execution of the big win game (makes the player expect the execution of the big win game).

(Special special electric control processing of the main control board)
The special figure special electric control processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is a flow chart showing a special figure special electric control process in the main control board 110. As shown in FIG.

First, in step S301, the main CPU 110a loads the special figure special electric processing data, and if the special figure special electric processing data=0, the processing is shifted to the special symbol storage determination processing (step S310), and the special figure special electric processing data=1. If so, the process is moved to special symbol variation processing (step S320), and if the special symbol special electric processing data = 2, the processing is moved to the special symbol stop processing (step S330), and if the special symbol special electric processing data = 3, the jackpot The processing is shifted to the game processing (step S340), and if the special figure special electric processing data=4, the processing is shifted to the jackpot game end processing (step S350).

Since this "special figure special electric processing data" is set as necessary in each subroutine of the special figure special electric control processing as described later, the necessary subroutines are appropriately processed in the progress of the game. Become.

In step S310, the main CPU 110a performs special symbol storage determination processing, and ends the current special symbol special electric control processing. Specifically, big hit determination processing, special symbol determination processing for determining special symbols to be stopped and displayed, variation time determination processing for determining the variation time of special symbols, and the like are performed. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S320, the main CPU 110a performs special symbol variation processing, and ends the current special symbol special electric control processing. Specifically, a process of determining whether or not the special symbol variation time has elapsed is performed, and when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, a process of shifting to a special symbol stop process of step S330 is performed. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S330, the main CPU 110a performs special symbol stop processing, and terminates the current special symbol special electric control processing. Specifically, along with performing processing corresponding to the special symbols (jackpot symbol, losing symbol) that are stopped and displayed, the number of time-saving games (J), the time-saving game flag, the number of high-probability games (X), and the high-probability game flag are set. Perform the setting process. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S340, the main CPU 110a performs a jackpot game process, and ends the current special figure special electric control process. Specifically, a process of controlling the jackpot game is performed. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S350, the main CPU 110a performs jackpot game end processing, and ends the current special figure special electric control processing. Specifically, a high probability game state or a probability game state of a low probability game state is determined, and a process of determining a game state of a time saving game state or a non-time saving game state is performed. . Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

(Special symbol memory judgment processing of the main control board)
The special symbol memory determination processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing the special symbol storage determination process in the main control board 110. As shown in FIG.

First, in step S310-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the special symbols are being variably displayed. If the special symbol is being variably displayed (special symbol time counter ≠ 0), the current special symbol storage determination process is terminated, and if the special symbol is not being variably displayed (special symbol time counter = 0), step S310. -2 is processed.

The main CPU 110a determines whether or not the second special symbol reservation number (U2) is 1 or more in step S310-2. When the second special symbol reservation number (U2) is 1 or more, the process is moved to step S310-3, and when the second special symbol reservation number (U2) is not 1 or more, the process is moved to step S310-4. .

In step S310-3, the main CPU 110a subtracts 1 from the second special symbol reservation number (U2) to update it, and shifts the process to step S310-6.

The main CPU 110a determines whether or not the first special symbol reservation number (U1) is 1 or more in step S310-4. If it is determined that the first special symbol reservation number (U1) is 1 or more, the process is moved to step S310-5, and if the first special symbol reservation number (U1) is not 1 or more, go to step S318-1 transfer processing.

In step S310-5, the main CPU 110a subtracts 1 from the first special symbol reservation number (U1) to update it, and shifts the process to step S310-6.

In step S310-6, the main CPU 110a determines the special symbol stored in the special symbol determination information retention storage area corresponding to the special symbol retention number (U) subtracted in step S310-3 or step S310-5. Perform information shift (storage area shift). Specifically, each special figure determination information stored in the first special figure determination information storage area or the second special figure determination information storage area from the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit is stored one before shift to the Here, the special figure determination information stored in the first storage unit is shifted to the special figure execution storage area (0th storage unit). At this time, the special figure determination information used in the previous special symbol variation display already written in the special figure execution storage area (0th storage unit) is erased.

In this embodiment, the second special symbol reservation number (U2) is preferentially subtracted from the first special symbol reservation number (U1), but the first special symbol is in the order of winning the starting port. The number of reservations (U1) and the number of second special design reservations (U2) may be subtracted, or the number of first special design reservations (U1) is preferentially subtracted over the number of second special design reservations (U2). You may make it

In step S310-7, the main CPU 110a receives a special symbol indicating the first special symbol reserved number (U1) or the second special symbol reserved number (U2) subtracted in step S310-3 or step S310-5. A symbol memory designation command is determined, and the determined special symbol memory designation command is set in a performance transmission data storage area. As a result, the special symbol storage designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 120, the number of the first pending icon or the second pending icon displayed on the image display device 31 is reduced, the first pending icon, or A process of changing the second reserved icon to the variable icon is performed.

In step S311, the main CPU 110a performs a big hit determination process. Specifically, with reference to the jackpot determination table shown in FIG. With reference to the special symbol determination table shown in 6, the special symbol display device (type of start port) and the type of special symbol (stop Toku-zu data) is determined. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

The main CPU 110a performs special figure variation pattern determination processing in step S312. Specifically, referring to the special symbol variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 10, the special symbol display device (type of starting port), the result of the jackpot lottery, the special symbol, the number of special symbol reservations (U), the special symbol execution A variation pattern of special symbols is determined based on the random number value for reach determination and the random number value for special figure variation stored in the storage area.

In step S313, the main CPU 110a sets a variation pattern designation command corresponding to the determined variation pattern in the effect transmission data storage area. As a result, the variation pattern specification command is transmitted to the performance control board 120, and the performance control board 120 performs the processing for executing the variation performance corresponding to the variation pattern so as to correspond to the variable display of the special symbols. .

In step S314, the main CPU 110a confirms the game state at the start of fluctuation, and sets a game state designation command corresponding to the current game state in the effect transmission data storage area. Thereby, the game state designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 120, and the game state can be grasped in the effect control board 120. - 特許庁

In step S315, the main CPU 110a sets the special symbol variation time (counter value) based on the variation pattern determined in step S312 in the special symbol time counter. The special symbol time counter is subtracted every 4 ms at S110.

The main CPU 110a starts variable display of special symbols in step S316. Specifically, the variable display data of the special symbol is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, display data for variably displaying the special symbols on the first special symbol display device 20 or the second special symbol display device is created in step S600, and the created data is output in step S700. Then, the variable display of the special symbols is performed by the first special symbol display device 20 or the second special symbol display device 21 .

In step S317, the main CPU 110a sets the special symbol special electric processing data=1, prepares to move to the special symbol variation processing shown in FIG. 22, and ends the current special symbol storage determination processing.

In step S318-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not there is a customer waiting state flag indicating a customer waiting state (standby state) in which the variable display of special symbols and the jackpot game are not being executed. If there is a customer waiting state flag, the current special symbol storage determination processing is terminated, and if there is no customer waiting state flag, the processing is moved to step S318-2.

In step S318-2, the main CPU 110a sets a customer waiting state flag indicating a customer waiting state in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c. The specified command is set in the performance transmission data storage area, and the current special symbol storage determination process is terminated. As a result, the customer waiting state specifying command is transmitted to the effect control board 120, and the process for executing the customer waiting effect is performed by the effect control board 120. - 特許庁

(Jackpot judgment processing of the main control board)
The jackpot determination process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing the big win determination process in the main control board 110. As shown in FIG.

In step S311-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not it is a big win. Specifically, if the special figure determination information stored in the special figure execution storage area is shifted from the first special figure determination information holding storage area, the jackpot lottery jackpot shown in FIG. 5 (a) With reference to the determination table, if the special figure determination information stored in the special figure execution storage area is shifted from the second special figure determination information holding storage area, the big hit lottery shown in FIG. 5 (b) With reference to the jackpot determination table, it is determined whether or not it is a "jackpot" based on the random number value for jackpot determination stored in the special figure execution storage area. If it is a jackpot, the process moves to step S311-2, and if it is not a jackpot, the process moves to step S311-5.

In step S311-2, the main CPU 110a performs a jackpot symbol determination process. Specifically, referring to the special symbol determination table for the big hit shown in FIG. 6(b), based on the random number value for special symbol determination stored in the special symbol execution storage area, the type of the special symbol for the big hit to be stopped and displayed. is determined, and stop special figure data corresponding to the type of the determined big hit special symbol is set in the stop special figure data storage area.

It should be noted that the stop special figure data set in the stop special figure data storage area is used for determining whether or not it is a "jackpot symbol" in the special symbol stop processing of FIG. , and is also used to determine the game state after the end of the big win in the big win game ending process of FIG.

In step S311-3, the main CPU 110a sets the big hit effect symbol designation command corresponding to the stop special figure data determined in step S311-2 in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the effect symbol designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 120, and the type of the big hit special symbol stopped and displayed on the effect control board 120 (stop special symbol data) can be grasped.

In step S311-4, the main CPU 110a determines the game state when the jackpot is won from the information set in the game state storage area (time saving game flag storage area, high probability game flag storage area), and determines the game state when the jackpot is won. is set in the game state buffer. Specifically, if both the time saving game flag and the high probability game flag are not set, 00H is set, and if the time saving game flag is not set but the high probability game flag is set, 01H is set, If the time saving game flag is set but the high probability game flag is not set, 02H is set, and if both the time saving game flag and the high probability game flag are set, 03H is set.

The reason why we set the game state at the time of winning the jackpot in the game state buffer separately from the game state storage area (time saving game flag storage area, high probability game flag storage area) is that during the jackpot game Since the high-probability game flag and time-saving game flag in the state storage area (time-saving game flag storage area, high-probability game flag storage area) are reset, based on the game state at the time of winning the jackpot after the jackpot, a new This is because the game state storage area cannot be referred to when determining the game state at the end of the jackpot. For this reason, by providing a game state buffer for storing game information indicating the game state at the time of winning the jackpot separately from the game state storage area, by referring to the game information in the game state buffer after the jackpot is completed, Based on the game state at the time of winning the jackpot, a new game state after the end of the jackpot (time-saving game state, number of time-saving games, etc.) can be set.

The main CPU 110a performs a losing symbol determination process in step S311-5. Specifically, referring to the special symbol determination table for the loss shown in FIG. 6(a), based on the random number value for special symbol determination stored in the special symbol execution storage area, the type of the lost special symbol to be stopped and displayed is determined, and the stop special figure data corresponding to the type of the determined loss special symbol is set in the stop special figure data storage area.

In step S311-6, the main CPU 110a sets the effect symbol designation command for losing corresponding to the stop special figure data determined in step S311-5 in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, End the jackpot determination process. As a result, the effect symbol specifying command is transmitted to the effect control board 120, and the type of the lost special symbol stopped and displayed on the effect control board 120 (stop special symbol data) can be grasped.

(Special symbol variation processing of the main control board)
The special symbol variation processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing special symbol variation processing in the main control board 110 .

The main CPU 110a determines whether or not the variable time set in the special symbol time counter has elapsed in step S320-1. If the variation time has not elapsed, the special symbol variation processing of this time is terminated, and if the variation time has elapsed, the processing is moved to step S320-2.

In step S320-3, the main CPU 110a stops the variable display of the special symbols. Specifically, the variable display data set in step S316 is cleared, and the special symbols set in steps S311-2 and S311-5 are displayed on the first special symbol display device 20 or the second special symbol. Stop display data for causing the display device 21 to stop display is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the special symbols are stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 20 or the second special symbol display device 21, and the player is notified of the big hit determination result.

In step S320-3, the main CPU 110a sets a symbol determination command indicating that the special symbol has been stopped and displayed in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the design determination command is transmitted to the effect control board 120, and the effect control board 120 performs processing for ending the variable effect.

In step S320-4, the main CPU 110a sets the symbol stop time (0.5 seconds) for stopping and displaying the special symbols in the special symbol time counter. The special symbol time counter is updated by subtracting 1 every 4 ms in S110.

In step S320-5, the main CPU 110a sets the special symbol special electric processing data to 2, prepares to move to the special symbol stop processing shown in FIG. 23, and ends the current special symbol variation processing.

(Special symbol stop processing of the main control board)
The special symbol stop processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 23 is a flow chart showing special symbol stop processing in the main control board 110 .

The main CPU 110a determines in step S330-1 whether or not the symbol stop time set in step S320-4 has elapsed (is the special symbol time counter=0?). When the symbol stop time has passed, the process is moved to step S330-2, and when the symbol stop time has not passed, the current special symbol stop process is terminated.

The main CPU 110a performs time-saving game end determination processing in step S330-2. Specifically, when the time saving game flag is set in the main RAM 110c, the number of time saving games (J) is updated by subtracting 1, and whether or not the new number of time saving games (J) is "0" determine whether As a result, when the number of time-saving games (J) is "0", the time-saving game flag is cleared, and the process proceeds to step S330-3. On the other hand, if the time saving game flag is not set or if the number of time saving games (J) is not "0", the process proceeds directly to step S330-3.

In step S330-3, the main CPU 110a performs high-probability game end determination processing. Specifically, when the high-probability game flag is set in the main RAM 110c, the high-probability game count (X) is updated by subtracting 1, and the new high-probability game count (X) is "0". Determine whether or not there is As a result, when the high-probability game count (X) is "0", the high-probability game flag is cleared, and the process proceeds to step S330-4. On the other hand, if the high-probability game flag is not set, or if the number of high-probability games (X) is not "0", the process proceeds directly to step S330-4.

In step S330-4, the main CPU 110a sets a game state designation command corresponding to the current game state in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. Thereby, the game state designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 120, and the game state can be grasped in the effect control board 120. - 特許庁

The main CPU 110a determines whether or not the stop special figure data stored in the stop special figure data storage area is a jackpot symbol in step S330-5. If it is a jackpot pattern, the process goes to step S330-7, and if it is not a jackpot pattern, the process goes to step S330-6.

In step S330-6, the main CPU 110a sets the special symbol special electric processing data to 0, prepares to move to the special symbol memory determination processing shown in FIG. 20, and ends the current special symbol stop processing.

In step S330-7, the main CPU 110a sets the special figure special electric processing data to 3, and prepares to shift the processing to the jackpot game processing shown in FIG.

In step S330-8, the main CPU 110a performs normal game state transition processing. Specifically, the high-probability game flag, the high-probability game count (X), the time-saving game flag, and the time-saving game count (J) are cleared, and the normal game state (low-probability non-time-saving game state) is entered.

The main CPU 110a performs a jackpot start preparation setting process in step S330-9. Specifically, referring to the special electric accessory operation mode determination table shown in FIG. 8, the type of the jackpot game is determined based on the stop special figure data, and the jackpot opening mode for the jackpot shown in FIG. 9 is determined. A big winning hole opening mode determination table ("first big winning table", "second big winning table", "third big winning table", "fourth big winning table") corresponding to the kind of the big winning game is determined from the table group.

In step S330-10, the main CPU 110a sets an opening designation command corresponding to the type of jackpot game (first jackpot game to fourth jackpot game) in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the opening designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 120, and the process for executing the opening effect of the big winning game is performed by the effect control board 120. - 特許庁

In step S330-11, the main CPU 110a sets the opening time of the jackpot game to the special game timer counter, and terminates this special symbol stop process. Specifically, the opening time corresponding to the type of jackpot game is determined from the large winning opening opening mode determination table (see FIG. 9) determined in step S330-9, and set in the special game timer counter. It should be noted that the special game timer counter is subtracted every 4 ms in step S110.

(Jackpot game processing on the main control board)
The jackpot game processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 24 is a flow chart showing the jackpot game processing in the main control board 110. As shown in FIG.

First, in step S340-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the jackpot game is currently opening. Specifically, it is determined whether or not "0" is stored in the number of round games (R) storage area. If it is during the opening, the process moves to step S340-2, and if it is not during the opening, the process moves to S340-6.

The main CPU 110a determines whether or not the opening time set in the special game timer counter has elapsed in step S340-2. If the opening time has not passed, the current jackpot game process is terminated, and if the opening time has passed, the process proceeds to step S340-3.

In step S340-3, the main CPU 110a sets 1 to the number of round games (R) stored in the number of round games (R) storage area.

In step S340-4, the main CPU 110a performs a special winning opening opening process. Specifically, "1" is added to the number of openings (K), and energization data for energizing the first big prize opening/closing solenoid 16c or the second big prize opening/closing solenoid 17c is set, and the above With reference to the large winning opening mode determination table (see FIG. 9) determined in step S330-9, the first large winning opening 16 is determined based on the current number of round games (R) and the number of openings (K). Or, the opening time of the second big winning opening 17 is set in the special game timer counter. As a result, the first big winning opening 16 or the second big winning opening 17 is opened.

The main CPU 110a performs round designation command transmission determination processing in step S340-5. Specifically, when the number of opening times (K) is "1", that is, when a round game is started, a round designation command corresponding to the number of round games (R) is stored in the main RAM 110c for effect transmission data. Set to area. As a result, the round designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 120, and the effect control board 120 performs the process for executing the round effect of the jackpot game.

In step S340-6, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the jackpot game is currently ending. The ending is a period after all preset round games are completed. If it is during the ending, the process moves to step S340-18, and if it is not during the ending, the process moves to step S340-7.

In step S340-7, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the big winning opening is closed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the energization data for energizing the first big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 16c or the second big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 17c is set. If the big winning opening is closed, the process goes to step S340-8, and if the big winning opening is not closed, the process goes to step S340-9.

In step S340-8, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the closing time of the big winning opening set in the special game timer counter has elapsed. If the closing time has not passed, the current jackpot game process is ended, and if the closing time has passed, the process moves to step S340-4 to open the big winning opening.

In step S340-9, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not an opening end condition for ending the opening of the big winning opening is satisfied. Specifically, either the value of the big winning opening winning ball counter (C) reaches a specified number (9) or the opening time per time in the number of opening times (K) elapses. Determine whether or not it is established. When it is determined that the opening end condition is satisfied, the process is moved to step S340-10, and when it is determined that the opening end condition is not satisfied, the current jackpot game process is terminated.

In step S340-10, the main CPU 110a performs a big winning opening closing process. Specifically, the energization data for energizing the first big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 16c or the second big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 17c is cleared, and the opening mode of the big winning opening determined in step S330-9 is determined. With reference to the table (see FIG. 9), the closing time ( Closing interval time, or one closing time) is set in the special game timer counter. As a result, the first big winning opening 16 or the second big winning opening 17 is closed.

The main CPU 110a determines in step S340-11 whether or not one round has ended. Specifically, whether or not either the value of the winning ball counter (C) for the big winning opening reaches a specified number (9) or the number of openings (K) reaches the maximum number of openings. determine whether If one round has ended, the process moves to step S340-12, and if one round has not ended, the current jackpot game process ends.

The main CPU 110a performs round data initialization processing in step S340-12. Specifically, the number of openings (K) and the winning ball counter (C) are cleared. However, the number of round games (R) is not cleared.

In step S340-13, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the number of round games (R) has reached the maximum number of round games. If it is the maximum number of round games played, the process moves to step S340-15, and if it is not the maximum number of round games, the process moves to step S340-14.

In step S340-14, the main CPU 110a adds "1" to the number of round games (R) and stores it, and ends the current jackpot game process.

In step S340-15, the main CPU 110a clears the number of round games played (R), and in step S340-16, based on the large winning opening opening mode determination table (see FIG. 9) determined in step S330-9. , The type of special game (long winning game, short winning game, development winning game) is determined, and an ending designation command corresponding to the type of big winning game is set in the performance transmission data storage area. As a result, the ending specifying command is transmitted to the effect control board 120, and the process for executing the ending effect of the big winning game is performed by the effect control board 120. - 特許庁

At step S340-17, the main CPU 110a sets the ending time corresponding to the type of jackpot game to the special game timer counter based on the big winning opening mode determination table (see FIG. 9) determined at step S330-9. set.

The main CPU 110a determines whether or not the ending time set in the special game timer counter has elapsed in step S340-18. If the ending time has passed, the process proceeds to step S340-19, and if the ending time has not passed, the current jackpot game process is terminated.

In step S340-19, the main CPU 110a sets 4 to the special figure special electric processing data, prepares to move to the big winning game end processing shown in FIG. 25, and ends the current big winning game processing.

(Jackpot game end processing of the main control board)
The jackpot game end processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25 is a flow chart showing a jackpot game ending process in the main control board 110 .

The main CPU 110a loads the stop special figure data set in the stop special figure data storage area and the game state information in the game state buffer in step S350-1.

The main CPU 110a performs high probability game flag setting processing in step S350-2. Specifically, referring to the setting data table at the end of the jackpot game shown in FIG. 7, based on the loaded stop special figure data and the game state information, whether to shift to the high probability game state at the end of the jackpot game If it is determined whether to shift to the high probability game state, a high probability game flag indicating that it is in the high probability game state is set in the high probability game flag storage area. For example, if the stop special figure data is "01", a high probability game flag is set.

In step S350-3, the main CPU 110a performs high probability game number setting processing. Specifically, referring to the set data table at the end of the jackpot game shown in FIG. 7, based on the loaded stop special figure data and game state information, it is the number of times of variable display that can be executed in the high probability game state. A high-probability game number (X) is determined, and the determined high-probability game number (X) is set in a high-probability game number (X) storage area. For example, if the stop special figure data is "01", 80 times is set as the high probability game frequency (X).

The main CPU 110a performs a time saving game flag setting process in step S350-4. Specifically, referring to the setting data table at the end of the jackpot game shown in FIG. 7, based on the loaded stop special figure data and game information, it is determined whether to shift to the time saving game state at the end of the jackpot game. When it determines and makes it shift to a time saving game state, the time saving game flag which shows that it is a time saving game state is set to the time saving game flag storage area. For example, when the game state information is 01H, 02H, or 03H, the time saving game flag is set.

The main CPU 110a performs time-saving game count determination processing in step S350-5. Specifically, referring to the setting data table at the end of the jackpot game shown in FIG. The number of games (J) is determined, and the determined number of time-saving games (J) is set in the number of time-saving games (J) storage area. For example, when the stop special figure data is "04" and the game state information is 00H, the number of time-saving games (J) is set to 0 times, and when the game state information is 01H, 02H, or 03H, the number of time-saving games ( J) is set to 80 times.

In step S350-6, the main CPU 110a identifies the game state by checking the presence or absence of the high-probability game flag and the time-saving game flag, and sends a game state designation command indicating the identified game state to the effect transmission data storage area. set. Thereby, the game state designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 120, and the game state can be grasped by the effect control board 120. - 特許庁

In step S350-7, the main CPU 110a sets the special symbol special electric processing data to 0, prepares to shift the processing to the special symbol storage determination processing shown in FIG. 20, and ends the current jackpot game end processing.

(Public power control processing of the main control board)
Using FIG. 26, the normal/universal power control processing of the main control board 110 will be described. FIG. 26 is a flow chart showing the normal/universal power control process in the main control board 110. As shown in FIG.

First, in step S401, the main CPU 110a loads the normal pattern normal electric processing data, and if the normal pattern general electric processing data = 0, the process shifts to the normal symbol variation processing (step S410), and the normal pattern normal electric processing data If =1, the process is shifted to the auxiliary game process (step S420).

This "general and general electric processing data" is set as necessary in each subroutine of the general and general electric control processing as will be described later, so that the necessary subroutines are appropriately processed in the progress of the game. It will be.

In step S410, the main CPU 110a performs a normal symbol variation process, and terminates the current normal pattern normal electric control process. Specifically, hit determination processing, processing for displaying the normal symbols in a variable manner, processing for displaying the normal symbols in a stopped state, and the like are performed. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S420, the main CPU 110a performs an auxiliary game process, and terminates the current general/universal electric power control process. Specifically, the process of controlling the auxiliary game is performed. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

(Normal pattern variation processing of the main control board)
The normal symbol variation processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 27 is a flow chart showing normal symbol variation processing in the main control board 110 .

In step S410-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not normal symbols are displayed in a variable manner. When the normal symbols are displayed in a variable manner, the process proceeds to step S410-9, and when the normal symbols are not displayed in a variable manner, the process proceeds to step S410-2.

The main CPU 110a determines whether the number of reserved normal symbols (G) is 1 or more in step S410-2. When the normal design reserved number (G) is 1 or more, the process is moved to step S410-3, and when the normal design reserved number (G) is not 1 or more, the current normal design variation process is terminated.

In step S410-3, the main CPU 110a subtracts 1 from the number of reserved normal symbols (G) to update it, and shifts the process to step S410-4.

In step S410-4, the main CPU 110a shifts the normal pattern determination information stored in the normal pattern reservation storage area. Specifically, each normal figure determination information stored in the fourth storage unit from the first storage unit is shifted to the previous storage unit. Here, the normal pattern determination information stored in the first storage unit is shifted to the normal pattern execution storage area (0th storage unit). At this time, the special figure determination information used in the previous normal symbol fluctuation display that has already been written in the general figure execution storage area (0th storage unit) is erased.

The main CPU 110a performs hit determination processing in step S410-5. Specifically, with reference to the hit determination table shown in FIG. 12(a), it is determined whether or not the hit is based on the game state and the random number value for hit determination stored in the normal pattern execution storage area. .

The main CPU 110a performs normal symbol determination processing in step S410-6. Specifically, referring to the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 12(b), based on the current time-saving gaming state, the lottery result of the winning lottery, and the obtained random number for normal symbol determination, stop display. The normal pattern (stop normal pattern data) is determined, the determined stop normal pattern data is set in the stop normal pattern data storage area, and the normal pattern designation command corresponding to the stop normal pattern data is stored in the main RAM 110c as performance transmission data. Set to area. Thereby, the general pattern designation command is transmitted to the production control board 120, and the stop general pattern data can be grasped in the production control board 120. - 特許庁

In step S410-7, the main CPU 110a performs normal symbol variation time determination processing. Specifically, referring to the normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. A symbol variation time is determined and set in a normal symbol time counter, and a normal symbol variation designation command corresponding to the normal symbol variation time is set in a performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the normal pattern fluctuation specification command is transmitted to the production control board 120, and the production control board 120 can usually grasp the fluctuation time of the pattern.

In step S410-8, the main CPU 110a starts variable display of normal symbols, and ends the current normal symbol variation process. Specifically, the variable display data of normal symbols are set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the display data for variably displaying the normal symbols on the normal symbol display device 22 is generated in the above step S600, and the generated data is output in step S700, so that the normal symbol display device 22 displays normal symbols. A variable display will be performed.

In step S410-9, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the variable time set in the normal symbol time counter has elapsed. If the variation time has not elapsed, the current normal symbol variation processing is terminated, and if the variation time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S410-10.

The main CPU 110a stops the variable display of normal symbols in step S410-10. Specifically, the variable display data set in step S410-8 is cleared, and the stop display data for stopping and displaying the normal design set in step S410-6 on the normal design display device 22 is used as the main display data. It is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 110c. As a result, the normal symbol is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display device 22, and the player is notified of the hit determination result.

In step S410-11, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the stop normal pattern data set in the stop normal pattern data storage area is a winning normal pattern. If it is a winning normal symbol, the process is moved to step S410-12, and if it is not a winning normal symbol, this normal symbol variation process is terminated.

In step S410-12, the main CPU 110a sets normal/universal electrical processing data=1, prepares to shift the processing to the auxiliary game processing shown in FIG. 28, and performs opening mode determination processing in step S410-13. Specifically, referring to the start opening mode determination table shown in FIG. Determines the opening time, interval time, and ending time of the auxiliary game.

In step S410-14, the main CPU 110a sets the opening time of the auxiliary game to the auxiliary game timer counter, and terminates this normal symbol variation process. It should be noted that the auxiliary game timer counter is subtracted every 4 ms in step S110.

(Auxiliary game processing of the main control board)
The auxiliary game processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 28 is a flow chart showing auxiliary game processing in the main control board 110. As shown in FIG.

First, in step S420-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the auxiliary game is currently opening. If it is during the opening, the process moves to step S420-2, and if it is not during the opening, the process moves to S420-4.

The main CPU 110a determines whether or not the opening time set in the auxiliary game timer counter has passed in step S420-2. If the opening time has not passed, the current auxiliary game process is ended, and if the opening time has passed, the process is moved to step S420-3.

In step S420-3, the main CPU 110a performs the second start opening opening process, and ends the current auxiliary game process. Specifically, "1" is added to the number of times of opening (S), energization data for energizing the starting port opening/closing solenoid 15c is set, and the opening of the second starting port 15 corresponding to the number of times of opening (S) is performed. Set the time in the auxiliary game timer counter. As a result, the second starting port 15 is opened.

In step S420-4, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the auxiliary game is currently ending. If it is during the ending, the process moves to step S420-12, and if it is not during the ending, the process moves to step S420-5.

In step S420-5, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the second starting port 15 is closed (interval). Specifically, it is determined whether or not energization data for energizing the starting port opening/closing solenoid 15c is set. If the second starting port 15 is closed, the process proceeds to step S420-6, and if the second starting port 15 is not closed, the process proceeds to step S420-7.

The main CPU 110a determines whether or not the closing time (interval time) of the second starting port 15 set in the auxiliary game timer counter has elapsed in step S420-6. If the closing time has not elapsed, the current auxiliary processing is terminated, and if the closing time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S420-3 to open the second starting port 15.

In step S420-7, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not an opening end condition for ending the opening of the second starting port 15 is satisfied. Specifically, either the value of the second start opening winning ball counter (D) reaches a specified number (10) or the opening time per time in the number of openings (S) elapses. is established. If it is determined that the open end condition is satisfied, the process is moved to step S420-8, and if it is determined that the open end condition is not satisfied, the auxiliary game process of this time is terminated.

In step S420-8, the main CPU 110a performs the second starting opening closing process. Specifically, the energization data for energizing the starting port opening/closing solenoid 15c is cleared, and the closing time of the second starting port 15 determined in step S410-13 is set to the auxiliary game timer counter. As a result, the second starting port 15 is closed.

The main CPU 110a determines whether or not the auxiliary game ends in step S420-9. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the number of times (S) of opening the second starting port has reached the maximum number of times of opening. If the auxiliary game is to be terminated, the process proceeds to step S420-10, and if the auxiliary game is not to be terminated, the current auxiliary game process is terminated.

The main CPU 110a performs auxiliary game end processing in step S420-10. Specifically, the number of opening times (S) and the second start opening winning ball counter (D) are cleared.

In step S420-11, the main CPU 110a sets the ending time determined in step S410-13 to the auxiliary game timer counter.

The main CPU 110a determines whether or not the ending time set in the auxiliary game timer counter has elapsed in step S420-12. If the ending time has passed, the process proceeds to step S420-13, and if the ending time has not passed, the current auxiliary game process is terminated.

In step S420-13, the main CPU 110a sets 0 to the normal pattern normal electric processing data, prepares to shift the processing to the normal pattern variation processing shown in FIG. 27, and ends the current auxiliary game processing.

(Main processing of production control section)
Processing executed by the sub CPU 120a in the effect control section 120m will be described. First, using FIG. 29, the main processing of the effect control section 120m will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing main processing in the effect control section 120m.

First, the sub CPU 120a performs initialization processing in step S1000. In this processing, the sub CPU 120a reads the main processing program from the sub ROM 120b in response to power-on, and performs processing to initialize and set flags stored in the sub RAM 120c.

The sub CPU 120a performs sub random number update processing in step S1100. In this process, the sub CPU 120a performs a process of updating various random numbers stored in the sub RAM 120c. After that, the process of step S1100 is repeated until a predetermined interrupt process is performed.

(Timer interrupt processing of production control unit)
The timer interrupt processing of the effect control section 120m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing in the effect control section 120m. In addition, although not shown, a clock pulse is generated every predetermined period (2 milliseconds) by a reset clock pulse generation circuit provided in the effect control unit 120m, and a timer interrupt processing program is read, and the effect control board timer interrupt processing is executed.

In step S1300, the sub CPU 120a saves the information stored in the register of the sub CPU 120a to the stack area.

In step S1400, the sub CPU 120a performs command analysis processing. In this process, the sub CPU 120a analyzes the command stored in the reception buffer of the sub RAM 120c. Details of the command analysis processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 31 and 32. FIG.

In addition, when the command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received, the effect control unit 120m generates a command reception interrupt process of the effect control unit 120m (not shown), and stores the received command in the reception buffer of the sub RAM 120c. It has become.

In step S1500, the sub CPU 120a performs timer update processing for updating various timer counters used in the effect control section 120m.

In step S1700, the sub CPU 120a determines whether the signals of the effect button detection switch 35a and the cross key detection switch 36b are input via the frame control board 180, and inputs the signals of the effect button detection switch 35a, etc. If so, effect input control processing for transmitting a effect button signal or the like to the image control unit 150 is performed.

In step S1800, the sub CPU 120a performs data output processing for transmitting various commands set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c to the frame control board 180 and the image control section 150. FIG.

In step S1900, the sub CPU 120a restores the information saved in step S1300 to the register of the sub CPU 120a.

(Command analysis processing of production control unit)
Next, the command analysis processing of the effect control section 120m will be described with reference to FIGS. 31 and 32. FIG. FIG. 31 is a flow chart showing command analysis processing (1) in the effect control unit 120m, and FIG. 32 is a flow chart showing command analysis processing (2) in the effect control unit 120m. Command analysis processing (2) is performed subsequent to command analysis processing (1).

The sub CPU 120a refers to the reception buffer in step S1401 to determine whether or not a command has been received. If the command has been received, the process proceeds to step S1410, and if the command has not been received, the current command analysis process ends.

The sub CPU 120a determines in step S1410 whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a special symbol storage designation command. If it is a special symbol storage specification command, the process moves to step S1411, and if it is not a special symbol storage specification command, the process moves to step S1420.

In step S1411, the sub CPU 120a performs pending storage update processing, and terminates the current command analysis processing. Specifically, the number of reserved memories is analyzed from the received special symbol memory designation command, and processing such as setting the analyzed reserved memory number to the reserved memory number counter of the sub-RAM 120c is performed.

In step S1420, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is the starting entry winning designation command. If it is the starting opening winning designation command, the process is moved to step S1421, and if it is not the starting opening winning designation command, the process is moved to step S1430.

In step S1421, the sub CPU 120a performs icon change effect determination processing, and terminates the current command analysis processing. Specifically, based on the content of the received start-up winning designation command, processing for determining whether or not to execute the icon change effect and the change scenario is performed. The details of this icon change effect determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Note that the icon change effect is to change the display mode of the icon (suspended icon, the variable icon) displayed on the image display device 31, so that the jackpot game is executed over one or a plurality of variable effects. It is a type of look-ahead effect that suggests that there is a possibility that a jackpot game will be executed (expecting that a jackpot game will be executed).

In step S1430, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is the effect symbol designation command. If it is a production design designation command, the process goes to step S1431, and if it is not a production design designation command, the process goes to step S1440.

In step S1431, the sub CPU 120a performs basic symbol data determination processing, and terminates the current command analysis processing. Specifically, based on the contents of the received performance design designation command, the presence or absence of the jackpot, the basic pattern data (first to fourth jackpot pattern data, losing pattern data) that can identify the type of the jackpot. process.

In step S1440, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a variation pattern specifying command. If it is a variation pattern specification command, the process moves to step S1441, and if it is not a variation pattern specification command, the process moves to step S1450.

In step S1441, the sub CPU 120a performs variation effect pattern determination processing. Specifically, based on the contents of the received variable pattern designation command, a variable performance pattern, which is a performance mode of the variable performance to be executed using various production devices, is determined, and the determined variable performance pattern is performed. A process of setting the variation effect pattern command in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 120c is performed. As a result, the variable effect pattern command is transmitted to the image control unit 150 and the frame control board 180, and processing for executing the variable effect is performed. The details of this variation effect pattern determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S1442, the sub CPU 120a performs icon display mode update processing. Specifically, the display mode of the pending icon and the variable icon displayed on the image display device 31 is updated based on the change scenario determined in the above-described icon change effect determination process and the determined variable effect pattern. Then, the processing for executing the icon change effect is performed.

In step S1443, the sub CPU 120a performs a jackpot announcement effect determination process. Specifically, based on the determined variable performance pattern, processing for determining the presence or absence of the big-hit announcement performance, the type of the big-hit announcement performance to be executed, and the like is performed. The details of this jackpot announcement effect determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

It should be noted that the big-hit announcement effect is an effect that suggests the possibility that the big-hit game will be executed as a result of the variable performance being executed (makes the player expect that the big-hit game will be executed).

In step S1444, the sub CPU 120a performs a stock announcement effect determination process. Specifically, processing for determining the presence or absence of the stock announcement effect, the type of the stock announcement effect to be executed (according to the game state), etc. is performed based on the determined variable effect pattern. The details of this stock announcement effect determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Note that the stock notice effect is the following effect.
- Acquire one or a plurality of icons shown in FIG.
・In one variable effect (for example, the second half) in which the above icon is acquired, release the acquired one or more icons (if multiple icons are acquired, release them one by one), and the icons released during the variable effect A predetermined event (movement of the first decorative member 33a (effect accessory), effect of changing the variable icon, promotion of operation of the effect button 35, etc.) is generated according to the condition.
As an example, in the first stock effect (see FIGS. 67 to 69), which will be described later,
(B) The pattern of acquiring and releasing icons is described in 1 variable production,
In the second stock effect (see FIGS. 73 and 74), which will be described later, as an example,
(b) A pattern is described in which icons are obtained with multiple variations and icons are released with a single variation.
Not limited to these
(C) A pattern in which icons are acquired with multiple variations and icons are released with multiple variations (D) A pattern in which icons are acquired with a single variation and icons are released with multiple variations may be provided.
Also, the pattern to be executed for each stock effect may be selected as appropriate. For example, the above (a) to (2) may be executed in both the first stock effect and the second stock effect, or the pattern to be executed in the first stock effect and the second stock effect may be different. . For example, the above (b) and (c) may be executed in the first stock effect, and the above (a) and (d) may be executed in the second stock effect.
It should be noted that the case of multiple fluctuations can be realized by using the pre-determination table of FIG. 11 .
Further details of the stock preview effect will be described with reference to FIG. 66 and subsequent figures.

In addition, hereinafter, the icon shown in FIG. 66 etc. in the stock notice effect is simply referred to as "icon", the granting of "icon" is referred to as "acquisition", and the use of "icon" is referred to as "acquisition". Write "release".
Also, the "stock notice effect" may be simply described as "stock effect", or the first stock effect, second stock effect, and third stock effect may be collectively referred to as simply "stock effect".

The sub CPU 120a performs timer effect determination processing in step S1445, and terminates the current command analysis processing. Specifically, based on the presence or absence of the icon change effect, the determined variable effect pattern, and the like, processing for determining the presence or absence of execution of the timer effect and the effect mode of the timer effect to be executed is performed. The details of this timer effect determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Note that the timer effect is a predetermined event (icon change effect, various reach effects, zone effect, effect button 35 operation valid period, stop display of jackpot symbols, etc.) and the timing of occurrence of a predetermined event. Also, the countdown display (subtraction display) in the timer effect is updated at substantially the same intervals as the actual clocking.
In addition, the timer effect is not limited to the countdown display of a numerical value (timer). For example, an image simulating a meter is displayed, and the timing of the occurrence of a predetermined event is displayed by displaying the meter as it decreases. Alternatively, an image simulating an hourglass may be displayed, and the timing at which a predetermined event will occur may be suggested by displaying the sand in the hourglass moving from one side to the other, An image simulating a bomb may be displayed to indicate that the bomb will explode after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, thereby suggesting the timing at which a predetermined event occurs. That is, not only the display of the number of seconds but also the display of the period may suggest the timing at which a predetermined event occurs.

In step S1450, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is the pattern confirmation command. If it is a pattern confirmation command, the process moves to step S1451, and if it is not a pattern confirmation command, the process moves to step S1460.

In step S1451, the sub CPU 120a performs effect symbol stop processing, and terminates the current command analysis processing. Specifically, in order to stop and display the effect pattern 38, a process of setting a stop designation command for stopping and displaying the effect pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c is performed. As a result, the stop designation command is transmitted to the image control unit 150 and the frame control board 180, and processing for stopping and displaying the variable effect is performed.

The sub CPU 120a determines in step S1460 whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a gaming state designation command. If it is the game state designation command, the process moves to step S1461, and if it is not the game state designation command, the process moves to step S1470.

In step S1461, the sub CPU 120a performs game state setting processing, and terminates the current command analysis processing. Specifically, a process of specifying the current game state by referring to the received game state designation command and setting data indicating the specified game state in a predetermined area of the sub-RAM 120c is performed.

In step S1470, sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is an opening specifying command. If it is an opening specifying command, the process moves to step S1471, and if it is not an opening specifying command, the process moves to step S1480.

In step S1471, the sub CPU 120a performs opening effect pattern determination processing, and terminates the current command analysis processing. Specifically, based on the opening designation command, the effect pattern of the opening effect to be performed at the start of the jackpot game is determined, and the processing of setting the opening effect designation command corresponding to the determined effect pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c. conduct. As a result, the opening effect designation command is transmitted to the image control section 150 and the frame control board 180, and processing for executing the opening effect is performed.

Sub CPU 120a determines in step S1480 whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a round designation command. If it is a round designation command, the process moves to step S1481, and if there is no round designation command, the process moves to step S1490.

In step S1481, the sub CPU 120a performs round effect pattern determination processing, and terminates the current command analysis processing. Specifically, based on the round designating command, the effect pattern of the round effect performed during the round game is determined, and the process of setting the round effect designating command corresponding to the determined effect pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c is performed. . As a result, the round effect designation command is transmitted to the image control unit 150 and the frame control board 180, and the process for executing the round effect is performed.

In step S1490, sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is an ending designation command. If it is an ending specifying command, the process moves to step S1491, and if it is not an ending specifying command, this command analysis process ends.

In step S1491, the sub CPU 120a performs jackpot end effect pattern determination processing, and terminates the current command analysis processing. Specifically, based on the ending designation command, the effect pattern of the ending effect to be performed at the end of the jackpot game is determined, and the processing of setting the ending designation command corresponding to the determined effect pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c is performed. . As a result, the ending effect designation command is transmitted to the image control unit 150 and the frame control board 180, and the processing for executing the ending effect is performed.

(Icon change effect determination process)
Next, the icon change effect determination processing of the effect control section 120m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing icon change effect determination processing in the effect control section 120m.

First, the sub CPU 120a refers to the received start winning designation command in step S1421-1. Specifically, in this process, the sub CPU 120a analyzes the received start-up winning designation command, and grasps the winning/losing of the jackpot, the type of the jackpot, and the effect content (planned variation pattern).

In step S1421-2, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the current time is the executable period of the icon change effect. If it is determined that the icon change effect is executable, the process proceeds to step S1421-3, and if it is determined that the icon change effect is not executable, the current icon change effect determination process is terminated.

In determining whether or not the icon change effect is executable, it is determined that the effect mode in which the execution of the icon change effect is restricted, that the jackpot game is not being executed, or that the icon change effect is not being executed. is determined to be an executable period. Any one of the above three conditions, or only two conditions may be provided.

In step S1421-3, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not all of the prejudgment results of pending storage corresponding to the previously received start winning prize designation command, ie, preceding pending, are equal to or less than normal reach. If all are equal to or less than the normal reach, the process moves to step S1421-4, and if none is equal to or less than the normal reach, the process moves to step S1421-7.
It should be noted that normal reach or less means normal fluctuation, shortened fluctuation, and normal reach. That is, in this step S1421-3, it is determined whether or not all the preliminary determination results of the preceding suspension are normal fluctuation, shortening fluctuation, or normal reach.

In step S1421-4, the sub CPU 120a acquires the icon display mode determination random number for determining the final display mode of the icon displayed on the image display device 31, and in step S1421-5, the final display mode of the icon. is selected from the icon final display mode determination table (see FIG. 34). The details of this final icon display mode determination table will be described later with reference to FIG.

The sub CPU 120a determines the final display mode of the icon in step S1421-6. Specifically, in this process, the sub CPU 120a refers to the final icon display mode determination table, and selects one of a plurality of final icon display modes based on the starting point winning designation command and the random number value for determining the icon display mode. Determines the final display mode of each icon.

In step S1421-7, the sub CPU 120a determines the normal icon, which is the normal display mode, as the final icon display mode when the icon change effect is not executed.

In step S1421-8, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the determined final icon display mode is the display mode (special icon) for executing the icon change effect. If the final icon display mode is the display mode for executing the icon change effect, the process proceeds to step S1421-9, and if the final icon display mode is not the display mode for executing the icon change effect, the process proceeds to step S1421-11. to move.

In step S1421-9, the sub CPU 120a selects the change scenario determination table (see FIG. 35) for determining the scenario of the icon change effect. Details of this change scenario determination table will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S1421-10, the sub CPU 120a determines a change scenario, sets it in the look-ahead information storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number counter of the sub RAM 120c, and shifts the process to step S1421-12. Specifically, in this process, the sub CPU 120a refers to the change scenario determination table, and based on the final display mode of the icon, the number of reserved special symbols corresponding to the start winning prize designation command, and the selection rate, a plurality of One change scenario is determined from the change scenarios.

In step S1421-11, the sub CPU 120a determines a non-change scenario in which the icon change effect is not executed, sets it in the look-ahead information storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number counter of the sub RAM 120c, and shifts the process to step S1421-12.

In step S1421-12, the sub CPU 120a identifies the initial display mode when the icon is first displayed on the image display device 31 from the determined changed scenario or the non-changed scenario, and selects the icon according to the initial display mode. The initial display mode command is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 120c, and the current icon change effect determination processing is terminated. As a result, the icon initial display mode command is transmitted to the image control unit 150 and the frame control board 180, and the suspended icon in the display mode corresponding to the icon initial display mode command is displayed on the image display device 31, or a predetermined sound effect is displayed. It will be output.

Incidentally, in the icon change effect determination process of the present embodiment, when all the preliminary determination results of the preceding hold are equal to or less than the normal reach, the icon change effect (suspended icon change effect, the variable icon change effect) is executed. Alternatively, the icon change performance may be executed when the preliminary determination result of the preceding suspension is not to perform the ready-to-win performance, and the icon change performance may not be executed when the ready-to-win performance is to be performed. In this way, the change in the display mode of the pending icon does not occur during the variable effect corresponding to the preceding hold in which the ready-to-win effect is executed, and the hold icon during the variable effect corresponding to the preceding hold in which the ready-to-win effect is not executed. change of the display mode occurs, the ready-to-win effect is not hindered by the icon change effect, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, even if the pre-determination result of pre-holding includes the reach effect, the icon change effect may be executed, but in that case, the pre-determination result of pre-hold The icon change effect may be executed more easily (executed at a higher rate) in the case where the effect is not included than in the case where the ready-to-win effect is included.

(Icon final display mode determination table)
FIG. 34 is a diagram showing an icon final display mode determination table referred to when determining the final icon display mode. The final icon display mode determination table is associated with the type of start-point winning designation command, the allocation ratio (%) for each final icon display mode, and the final icon display mode to be determined.

The final icon display mode includes a white icon that is displayed in white as a normal icon, and a special icon that suggests that there is a possibility of a big win (a big win game is executed) by executing the icon change effect. A blue icon displayed in blue, a green icon displayed in green, a red icon displayed in red, a zebra icon displayed in zebra pattern (color), and a rainbow icon displayed in rainbow colors are set. The degree of expectation for a big win related to the special icon is higher in the order of (white icon <) blue icon < green icon < red icon < zebra icon < rainbow icon, and it is confirmed that the rainbow icon will be a big win. It has become an icon.

A first feature of the final icon display mode determination table shown in FIG. 34 is that the selection rate of the final icon display mode varies depending on the content of the effect. The starting winning prize information (starting opening winning prize designation command) includes information such as jackpot wins and losses, jackpot types, and effect contents (ready-to-win effects, etc., pseudo consecutive times).

Specifically, in the present embodiment, when the specific starting winning information indicating that the effect content is SP reach or SPSP reach, it indicates that the effect content is normal variation, shortened variation, or normal reach that does not become reach. The special icon is selected at a higher rate than in the case of normal startup prize information.

As a second feature of the final icon display mode determination table shown in FIG. 34, the selection rate of the final icon display mode is varied according to the number of pseudo-runs. Specifically, when the number of pseudo-runs is 1, a higher percentage of special icons with high expectations for big wins are selected than when the number of pseudo-runs is 0, and the number of pseudo-runs is 1. In the case of 2 times, the special icon with high expectation of big win is selected at a high rate, and when the number of simulated consecutive times is 3 times, the rainbow icon that confirms the big win is selected. It's like

(Change scenario determination table)
FIG. 35 is a diagram showing a change scenario determination table referred to when determining a change scenario. In the change scenario determination table, the final display mode of the icon, the number of reserved special symbols corresponding to the start winning designation command, the allocation ratio (%) for each scenario, and the type of change scenario to be determined are associated. For reference, the prior changes in each change scenario and the update mode for the changes are described.

Here, the "preliminary variation" is the variation display (variation effect) that is executed based on the special figure determination information stored earlier than the special figure determination information corresponding to the newly received starting entrance winning designation command. That is, "the variation" is a variation display (variation effect) that is executed based on the special figure determination information corresponding to the newly received starting entrance winning designation command.

In the change scenario, the display mode of the icon does not change during execution of the preliminary change (the pending icon change effect is not executed) and changes during the change (the change icon change effect is executed). ) Scenario (for example, scenario 01, etc.) and the display mode of the icon change during the execution of the prior variation (suspended icon change effect is executed) but do not change during the execution of the variation (the variation icon change Scenarios (for example, scenario 02, etc.) in which the effect is not executed, and changes in the display mode of the icon during the execution of the prior change and during the execution of the change (the pending icon change effect and the change icon change effect are A scenario (for example, scenario 12, etc.) to be executed is set.

As an example of the change scenario, the case where the change scenario 39 is selected in response to the reception of the starting opening winning designation command based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting opening 14 will be described.

In the change scenario 39, when the game ball enters the first starting port 14, a white icon is displayed as a pending icon at a position corresponding to the pending number "4" in the first pending icon display area 31a of the image display device 31. Is displayed. Then, the white icon is maintained until the preliminary change four times before the change being executed at the time the white icon is displayed is completed. After that, when the advance change before 3 changes is started, the white icon moves to the position corresponding to the number of reservations "3", the reservation icon change effect is executed, and the white icon changes to the blue icon. Then, when the preliminary change two changes before is started, the blue icon moves to a position corresponding to the number of reservations "2", and the blue icon is maintained until the preliminary change two changes before ends. After that, when the advance variation one variation before is started, the blue icon moves to the position corresponding to the number of suspension "1", and the suspension icon change effect is executed to change the blue icon to the green icon. When the variation starts, the green icon becomes the variation icon, the variation icon change effect is executed, the green icon changes to the red icon at a predetermined timing, and then the zebra icon changes to the zebra icon at a predetermined timing. do.
Note that when the final display mode of the icon changes to a blue icon, a green icon, a red icon, or a zebra icon, the display mode is changed step by step. A pattern with a two-step change (red→rainbow) may be provided, as in the case of a change to , or a pattern with a three-step change (for example, a change from a blue icon to a zebra icon) may be provided.

As the first feature of the change scenario determination table shown in FIG. 35, the scenario in which the display state of the icon changes during the execution of the change is more favorable than the scenario in which the display state of the icon changes when the game ball enters the starting hole. are being selected with a high percentage. By doing so, the expectation of whether or not the icon display mode will change (whether the icon change effect is executed) can be maintained until the change, and the interest in the game can be improved. Become.

In addition, as a second feature of the change scenario determination table shown in FIG. 35, when the icon display mode changes over a plurality of stages (green, red, and zebra icons are determined as the final icon display mode), It is set so that the number of stages in which the icon changes during the execution of the pre-variation tends to be greater than the number of stages in which the icon changes during the execution of the pre-variation. By doing so, it is possible to improve the expectation that the display mode of the icon changes over a plurality of stages in the change, and to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the change scenario determination table of the present embodiment, a scenario for changing the display mode of the icon is determined regardless of whether or not the ready-to-win effect (may be a ready-to-reach other than the normal reach) is executed in advance variation. However, the display mode of the icon is changed by a change scenario determination table in which whether or not a ready-to-win effect suggesting the possibility of a jackpot game being executed in advance fluctuation is executed or not is a determination element. A scenario may be determined. When such a change scenario determination table is used, there is no change in the display mode of the icon during the execution of the advance variation in which the ready-to-win effect is executed, and the icon display mode does not change during the preliminary variation in which the ready-to-win effect is not executed. It is preferable to set various scenarios so that changes in the display mode occur. In addition, a change in the display mode of the icon occurs during the execution of the preliminary variation in which the ready-to-win effect is executed and the preliminary variation in which the ready-to-win effect is not executed. Various scenarios may be set so that the change in the display mode of the icon occurs at a higher rate during the execution of the advance variation in which the change is not executed.

(Variation effect pattern determination process)
Next, with reference to FIG. 36, the fluctuation effect pattern determination processing of the effect control section 120m will be described. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing icon change effect determination processing in the effect control section 120m.

The sub CPU 120a refers to the received variation pattern designation command in step S1441-1, and selects a variation effect pattern determination table (see FIGS. 37 and 38) in step S1441-2.

In step S1441-3, the sub CPU 120a refers to the variable effect pattern determination table, and determines one variable effect pattern from among a plurality of variable effect patterns based on the variable pattern designation command and the distribution ratio (%). . The details of this variation effect pattern determination table will be described later with reference to FIGS. 37 and 38. FIG.

In step S1441-4, the sub CPU 120a sets the variable effect pattern specifying command corresponding to the determined variable effect pattern to the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c, and ends the current variable effect pattern determination process. As a result, the variable effect pattern designation command is transmitted to the image control unit 150 and the frame control board 180, and the process for executing the variable effect is performed.

(Variation production pattern decision table)
37 and 38 are diagrams showing a variation performance pattern determination table referred to when determining a variation performance pattern. In the variable performance pattern determination table, the variable performance pattern designation command, the allocation ratio (%) for each variable performance pattern, and the determined variable performance pattern are associated, and as a reference, the performance configuration for each variable performance pattern. is described.
In addition, FIG. 37 is a table referred to in the low probability non-work-time-saving gaming state, and FIG. 38 is a table referred to in the high-probability time-saving gaming state.

The variation production pattern is the variation performed using the production devices such as the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, the board drive device 33, the board lighting device 34a, the frame lighting device 34b, the production button 35, and the cross key 36. It is the effect mode of the effect, and the presence or absence of the pseudo continuous notice, the presence or absence of the ready-to-win effect, the contents of the ready-to-win effect, etc. are defined.

Here, each term described in the effect configuration of the variable effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 37 and 38 will be explained.

“Normal fluctuation” means that a normal fluctuation effect in which the ready-to-win state is not formed by the effect pattern 38 is performed.
"Shortened variation" indicates that a shortened variation effect is performed in which the ready-to-win state is not formed by the effect pattern 38, which is shorter than the normal variation effect.
"Normal reach" indicates that a normal reach effect in which a reach state is formed by the effect pattern 38 is performed.
"SP ready-to-win" indicates that a ready-to-win state is formed by the effect pattern 38, and an SP ready-to-win effect with a higher expectation for a big hit than the normal ready-to-win effect is performed.
"SPSP ready-to-win" indicates that a ready-to-win state is formed by the effect pattern 38, and SPSP ready-to-win effect with higher expectation for big hit than SP ready-to-win effect is performed.

"Pseudo-continuous failure" indicates that the pseudo-continuous advance notice is executed or not, but ultimately the result is that the pseudo-continuous advance notice is not executed.
"Pseudo-continuous success" indicates that a stimulating effect is executed to determine whether or not the pseudo-continuous advance notice will be executed, and finally the pseudo-continuous advance notice will be executed.

"Button non-collision" means that an operation promoting effect for prompting the operation of the effect button 35 is executed in the final phase (final stage) of the corresponding ready-to-win effect, and in this operation promoting effect, the effect button 35 is operated or the effect button 35 is pressed. When the operation effective period elapses, a winning/losing informing effect for informing whether or not a jackpot is won is executed, but the effect button 35 does not move upward during the operation effective period in the operation promoting effect and is in a non-protruding state (normal state). is maintained at
"Button hit" means that an operation promoting effect to prompt the operation of the effect button 35 is executed in the final phase (final stage) of the corresponding ready-to-win effect, and in this operation promoting effect, the effect button 35 is operated or the effect button 35 is operated. When the effective period elapses, a winning/losing informing performance for informing whether or not the game is a big hit is executed, but the performance button 35 moves upward during the operation valid period in this operation promoting performance to enter a projecting state (special state). is shown.

“Roulette effect” means displaying a plurality of development destination icons indicating development destinations (for example, losing, SP reach, heat zone, etc.) on the image display device 31, and selecting one development destination icon from the plurality of development destination icons. is selected to perform a roulette effect to move to the development destination indicated by the selected development destination icon.
"Zone effect" means that a specific effect (background display) different from the normal effect (background) is performed on the image display device 31 to announce the possibility that a jackpot game will be executed (the jackpot game will be executed). This indicates that zone production will be performed.
"Hot zone effect" is a specific effect (background display) that is different from the normal zone effect, and foretells that the possibility of executing the jackpot game is higher than the normal zone effect (the jackpot game is executed). This indicates that the heat zone production will be performed.
The “next notice” indicates that the next notice effect for notifying the type of ready-to-win effect (SPSP ready-to-win effect, all-rotation ready-to-win effect in this embodiment) to be finally performed in the variable effect is to be performed.

"Failure of ten-pie effect" means that in a variable effect pattern (for example, variable effect pattern 55) in which the ready-to-win effect is not executed, the player operates the effect button 35 one or more times to create a ten-pie effect that creates a ready-to-win state. As a result, the reach state is not formed.
'Successful Tenpai effect' means that in a variable effect pattern (for example, variable effect pattern 57) for executing a ready-to-win effect, the player operates the effect button 35 one or more times to form a ready-to-win state. result in the formation of reach conditions.
In the following description, "failed ten-pan effect" and "successful ten-pan effect" may be collectively referred to as "ten-pan effect."
"Determined effect 2 failure" means that in a variable effect pattern for executing SP reach (for example, variable effect pattern 58) or a variable effect pattern for executing SPSP reach (for example, variable effect pattern 66), the player is given a production button As a result of operating 35 once or multiple times, the result is that the first decorative member 33a (directing accessory) does not move downward (fall).
"Determined effect 2 success" means that in a variable effect pattern for executing SP reach (for example, variable effect pattern 81) or a variable effect pattern for executing SPSP reach (for example, variable effect pattern 89), the player is given a production button It shows that the first decorative member 33a (directing accessory) moves downward (drops) as a result of operating 35 once or multiple times.
In the following description, "decision effect 2 failure" and "decision effect 2 success" may be collectively referred to as "decision effect 2".

The first feature of the variable effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 37 and 38 is that the ready-to-win effect is more likely to be executed when the pseudo continuous advance notice effect is executed than when the pseudo continuous notice effect is not executed. The higher the number of executions of the pseudo continuous notice, the higher the expectation of the big win. By doing so, it is possible to heighten the player's expectation for whether or not the pseudo continuous notice is executed or the number of times the pseudo continuous notice is executed, and to improve the amusement of the game.

A second feature of the variable effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 37 and 38 is that the effect button 35 remains in the normal state during the operation effective period that occurs in the final phase (final stage) of the ready-to-win effect. However, when the effect button 35 is in a special state, the expectation for the big win is higher. By doing so, it is possible to heighten the expectation of the player as to whether or not the effect button 35 will be in the special state, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, as a third feature of the variable effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 37 and 38, the final phase of the ready-to-win effect is more pronounced when the heat zone effect is executed than when only the normal zone effect is executed. One of the points is that the production button 35 is likely to be in a special state during the valid operation period that occurs in the (final stage). By doing so, it is possible to heighten the expectation of the player as to which type of zone effect will be executed, and to improve the interest of the game.

A fourth feature of the variable effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 37 and 38 is that execution of the SPSP ready-to-win effect or full rotation ready-to-win effect is determined when the next notice effect is executed. By doing so, it is possible to heighten the player's sense of anticipation as to whether or not the next notice effect will be executed, and to improve the amusement of the game.

In the variable performance pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 37 and 38, there is no variable performance pattern in which normal reach is performed, SP reach is performed, and SP SP reach is performed, but it may be provided. .

(Jackpot announcement production decision processing)
Next, with reference to FIG. 39, the jackpot announcement effect determination processing of the effect control unit 120m will be described. FIG. 39 is a flow chart showing the jackpot announcement effect determination processing in the effect control section 120m.

First, in step S1343-1, the sub CPU 120a refers to the determined variable effect pattern, and in step S1443-2, uses the pre-reach announcement determination table (see FIG. 40) to determine whether or not to execute the pre-reach announcement effect. and a notice pattern in which the type of pre-reach notice effect to be executed is determined. The details of this pre-reach advance notice determination table will be described later using FIG. 40 .

In step S1443-3, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the determined notice pattern is a notice pattern for executing a dialog notice effect. If it is the notice pattern for executing the speech notice effect, the process moves to step S1443-4, and if it is the notice pattern for not executing the dialogue notice effect, the process moves to step S1443-6.

In addition, the dialogue forewarning effect means that the image display device 31 displays a dialogue suggesting the degree of expectation for the big win based on the operation of the performance button 35, and the audio output device 32 outputs a sound corresponding to the dialogue. It is one of the

In step S1443-4, the sub CPU 120a determines a dialogue pattern, which is the effect mode of the dialogue preview effect, using the dialogue pattern determination table (see FIG. 41(a)) and sets it in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 120c. The details of this dialogue pattern determination table will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S1443-5, the sub CPU 120a sets a command for designating a speech announcement effect corresponding to the determined speech pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c. As a result, the command for designating the dialog preview effect is transmitted to the image control unit 150 and the frame control board 180, and the processing for executing the dialog preview effect is performed.

In step S1443-6, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the determined notice pattern is a notice pattern for executing a step-up notice effect (SU notice effect). If it is the notice pattern for executing the step-up notice effect, the process moves to step S1443-7, and if it is not the notice pattern for executing the step-up notice effect, the process moves to step S1443-9.

In addition, the step-up notice effect is a predetermined number of steps from the first step (first stage) to the final step (final stage) according to the degree of expectation of the jackpot, until one of the plurality of steps (stages). It is a kind of jackpot announcement effect that executes step effects in order. Specifically, more step effects are more likely to be executed when the big win game is executed (higher expectation for the big win) than when the big win game is not executed.

In step S1443-7, the sub CPU 120a uses the step-up pattern determination table (see FIG. 41(b)) to determine the step-up pattern, which is the effect mode of the step-up notice effect, and store it in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 120c. set. The details of this step-up pattern determination table will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S1443-8, the sub CPU 120a sets a step-up notice effect designation command corresponding to the determined step-up pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c. As a result, the step-up notice effect specifying command is transmitted to the image control section 150 and the frame control board 180, and the process for executing the step-up notice effect is performed.

In step S1443-9, the sub CPU 120a uses the in-reach announcement determination table (see FIG. 42(a)) to determine whether or not to execute the in-reach announcement effect and the type of in-reach announcement effect to be executed. to decide. The details of this in-reach announcement determination table will be described later with reference to FIG. 42(a).

In step S1443-10, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the determined notice pattern is the notice pattern for executing the character group notice effect. If it is the notice pattern for executing the character group notice effect, the process moves to step S1443-11, and if it is the notice pattern for not executing the character group notice effect, the process moves to step S1443-13.

Note that the character group forewarning effect is one type of big win forewarning effect in which one of a plurality of types of characters with different degrees of expectation for big wins is displayed as a group on the image display device 31 .

In step S1443-11, the sub CPU 120a uses the character group pattern determination table (see FIG. 42(b)) to determine the character group pattern, which is the effect mode of the character group preview effect, and store it in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 120c. set. The details of this character group pattern determination table will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S1443-12, the sub CPU 120a sets a character group preview effect designation command corresponding to the determined character group pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c. As a result, the character group preview effect specification command is transmitted to the image control unit 150 and the frame control board 180, and the character group preview effect is executed.

The sub CPU 120a determines in step S1443-13 whether or not the determined notice pattern is the notice pattern for executing the title notice effect. If it is the announcement pattern for executing the title announcement effect, the process moves to step S1443-14, and if it is the announcement pattern for not executing the title announcement effect, the process moves to step S1443-16.

In addition, the title notice effect is to change the color of the title displayed on the image display device 31 when SP reach or SPSP reach is executed (reach title in SP reach or SPSP reach) in a color corresponding to the expected degree of big win. It is one of the big hit announcement effects to be displayed.

In step S1443-14, the sub CPU 120a uses the title pattern determination table (see FIG. 43(a)) to determine the title pattern, which is the effect mode of the title announcement effect, and sets it in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 120c. The details of this title pattern determination table will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S1443-15, the sub CPU 120a sets a title advance notice effect designation command corresponding to the determined title pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c. As a result, the title announcement effect specification command is transmitted to the image control unit 150 and the frame control board 180, and the title announcement effect is executed.

The sub CPU 120a determines in step S1443-16 whether or not the determined notice pattern is the notice pattern for executing the cut-in notice effect. If it is the notice pattern for executing the cut-in notice effect, the process is shifted to step S1443-17, and if it is the notice pattern for not executing the cut-in notice effect, the process is moved to step S1443-19.

Note that the cut-in notice effect means that the player operates the effect button 35 while the SP reach or SPSP reach is being executed, and the image display device 31 displays a character image corresponding to the degree of expectation for the big win. It is a type of performance.

In step S1443-17, the sub CPU 120a uses the cut-in pattern determination table (see FIG. 43(b)) to determine the cut-in pattern, which is the effect mode of the cut-in notice effect, and store it in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 120c. set. The details of this cut-in pattern determination table will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S1443-18, the sub CPU 120a sets a cut-in notice effect designation command corresponding to the determined cut-in pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c. As a result, the cut-in notice effect designation command is transmitted to the image control unit 150 and the frame control board 180, and the cut-in notice effect is executed.

In step S1443-19, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the referred variable effect pattern is a variable effect pattern for executing a tenpai effect. If it is the variable performance pattern that executes the ten-pie performance, the process is shifted to step S1443-20, and if it is the variable performance pattern that does not execute the ten-pie performance, the process is shifted to step S1443-22.

In step S1443-20, the sub CPU 120a uses the button pattern determination table (see FIG. 44(a)) to determine the button pattern of the Tenpai effect and sets it in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 120c. The details of this button pattern determination table will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S1443-21, the sub CPU 120a sets a ten-pie effect designating command corresponding to the determined button pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c. As a result, the ten-pie effect designating command is transmitted to the image control unit 150 and the frame control board 180, and the ten-pie effect is executed.

The sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the referred variable effect pattern is a variable effect pattern for executing the determined effect 2 in step S1443-22. If it is a variable performance pattern that executes the fixed performance 2, the process is moved to step S1443-23, and if it is a variable performance pattern that does not execute the fixed performance 2, this time's jackpot announcement performance determination processing is terminated.

In step S1443-23, the sub CPU 120a uses the decision effect 2 pattern determination table (see FIG. 44(b)) to determine the decision effect 2 pattern, which is the effect mode of the decision effect 2, and determines the predetermined area of the sub RAM 120c. set to The details of the determination effect 2 pattern determination table will be described later with reference to FIG. 44(b).

In step S1443-24, the sub CPU 120a sets a decision effect 2 designation command corresponding to the decided decision effect 2 pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c. As a result, the determination effect 2 designation command is transmitted to the image control unit 150 and the frame control board 180, and the determination effect 2 is executed.

(Preliminary decision table before reach)
FIG. 40 is a diagram showing a pre-reach notice determination table that is referred to when determining the notice pattern of the pre-reach notice. The pre-reach advance notice determination table is associated with the jackpot lottery result, the variation effect pattern type, the distribution ratio (%) for each advance notice pattern, and the advance notice pattern to be determined.

There are three types of advance notice patterns: "No notice", where the advance notice is not executed, "Dialogue notice effect", where the dialogue notice effect is executed, and "Step-up notice effect", where the step-up notice effect is executed. is set, and the expected jackpot is no notice < dialogue notice effect < step-up notice effect.

As a feature of the pre-reach notice determination table shown in FIG. 40, it is easier to execute the pre-reach notice in the case of a big win than in the case of a loss in the jackpot lottery result, and there is a variation production pattern with a low degree of expectation for a big win. There is a point that the pre-reach announcement is more likely to be executed when a variable performance pattern with a high degree of expectation for a big hit is determined than when it is determined. By doing so, it is possible to heighten the player's sense of expectation for the execution of the big winning game, and to improve the interest of the game.

(Dialog pattern determination table)
FIG. 41(a) is a diagram showing a dialogue pattern determination table referred to when determining a dialogue pattern. The speech pattern determination table is associated with the jackpot lottery result, the variation effect pattern type, the distribution ratio (%) for each speech pattern, and the speech pattern to be decided.

The dialogue pattern includes "normal dialogue" in which it is unknown whether or not a jackpot game will be executed, "reach confirmation dialogue" in which it is confirmed that the reach production will be executed, and that the reach production will be executed. Along with confirmation, four categories are set: "Expectation UP Dialogue" that suggests the possibility of a jackpot game being executed, and "Accurate Dialogue (Premium)" that confirms that a big win will occur. , and the degree of expectation for a big hit is normal lines < line for fixed reach < line for UP expectation < line for sure (big hit confirmed).

As a feature of the dialog pattern determination table shown in FIG. 41(a), in the case of a big win, more lines than the reach confirmation lines (reach confirmation lines, expectation UP lines, hit accuracy Lines) are easier to determine, and when a variable pattern with a high expectation for a big hit is decided, than when a variable pattern with a low expectation for a big hit is decided, the line (reach One of the points is that it is easy to determine fixed lines, expectations UP lines, and accurate lines. By doing so, it is possible to heighten the player's sense of expectation for the execution of the big winning game, and to improve the interest of the game.

(Step-up pattern determination table)
FIG. 41(b) is a diagram showing a step-up pattern determination table referred to when determining a step-up pattern. The step-up pattern determination table is associated with the jackpot lottery result, the variable performance pattern type, the allocation ratio (%) for each step-up pattern, and the determined step-up pattern.

The step-up patterns include "Normal SU1" in which the first step effect is executed, "Normal SU2" in which the first and second step effects are executed, and "Normal SU2" in which the first to third step effects are executed. SU3", 1st to 4th step effects are executed "Normal SU4", 1st to 5th step effects are executed "Normal SU5", 1st to 5th step effects are executed and a jackpot game is performed. There are six types of "probable SU5 (premium)" that are determined to be executed, and the expected degree of jackpot is normal SU1<normal SU2<normal SU3<normal SU4, normal SU5<possible SU5.

As a feature of the step-up pattern determination table shown in FIG. 41(b), a step-up pattern with a large number of executions of step effects is more likely to be determined in the case of a big win than in the case of a loss in the big win lottery result, resulting in a big win. A step-up pattern with a large number of executions of step effects is more likely to be determined when a variable performance pattern with a high degree of expectation for a big hit is determined than when a variable performance pattern with a low degree of expectation is determined. mentioned. By doing so, it is possible to heighten the player's sense of expectation for the execution of the big winning game, and to improve the interest of the game.

(Preliminary decision table during reach)
FIG. 42(a) is a diagram showing an in-reach announcement determination table that is referred to when determining an in-reach announcement announcement pattern. The jackpot lottery result, variation effect pattern type, distribution ratio (%) for each notice pattern, and decided notice pattern are associated with the in-reach notice determination table.

There are two types of notice patterns for the notice during reach: "No notice", in which the notice during reach is not executed, and "Character group notice effect", in which the character group notice effect is executed. <It is a character group announcement production.

The feature of the in-reach notice determination table shown in FIG. 42(a) is that in the case of a big win, the in-reach notice (character group notice effect) is more likely to be executed than in the case of a loss in the jackpot lottery result, and It is easier to execute the notice during reach (character group notice effect) when a variable effect pattern with a high expectation of a big hit is decided than when a variable effect pattern with a low expectation of a big hit is decided. mentioned. By doing so, it is possible to heighten the player's sense of expectation for the execution of the big winning game, and to improve the interest of the game.

It should be noted that the title notice effect and the cut-in notice effect are executed in the SP ready-to-win effect pattern and the SPSP ready-to-win effect pattern regardless of the jackpot lottery result. will be determined individually.

(Character group pattern determination table)
FIG. 42(b) is a diagram showing a character group pattern determination table referred to when determining a character group pattern. The character group pattern determination table is associated with the jackpot lottery result, the variation effect pattern type, the distribution ratio (%) for each character group pattern, and the character group pattern to be determined.

The character group pattern includes "first character group" in which the first character group is displayed, "second character group" in which the second character group is displayed, and "third character group" in which the third character group is displayed. , "4th character group (premier)" where the 4th character group is displayed and it is confirmed that it will be a big hit. Third character group<fourth character group (big hit confirmed).

A feature of the character group pattern determination table shown in FIG. 42(b) is that it is determined that a variable effect pattern equal to or higher than the SP ready-to-win effect will be executed when the character group announcement effect is executed. By doing so, it is possible to heighten the player's sense of anticipation as to whether or not the character group announcement effect will be executed, and to improve the amusement of the game.

(Title pattern determination table)
FIG. 43(a) is a diagram showing a title pattern determination table referred to when determining a title pattern. The title pattern determination table is associated with the jackpot lottery result, the variation effect pattern type, the distribution ratio (%) for each title pattern, and the determined title pattern.

The title pattern includes "normal color" where the title is displayed in a normal color (e.g. white), "blue" where the title is displayed in blue, "red" where the title is displayed in red, and "red" where the title is displayed in rainbow colors. There are four types of "rainbow color (premium)" that are displayed and confirmed as a jackpot, and the expected jackpot is normal color < blue < red < rainbow color (jackpot confirmed).

When a pattern with a high degree of expectation for a big win is determined, the title pattern may be displayed by switching to a pattern with a high degree of expectation for a big win after temporarily displaying a pattern with a low degree of expectation for a big win.
Specifically, when "red" has been determined, the display is first performed in "blue" and then switched from "blue" to "red".
Moreover, such switching may be performed step by step to a pattern with a high probability of winning a big hit, or may be switched by skipping one step, such as switching from "normal color" to "red".
Such pattern switching may be performed by releasing the "color up" icon in the "first stock effect" described later, or the pattern switching may be performed without going through the "first stock effect". may be broken.

(Cut-in pattern determination table)
FIG. 43(b) is a diagram showing a cut-in pattern determination table referred to when determining a cut-in pattern. The cut-in pattern determination table is associated with the jackpot lottery result, the variation effect pattern type, the distribution ratio (%) for each cut-in pattern, and the cut-in pattern to be determined.

The cut-in pattern includes "normal color" where the cut-in is displayed in a normal color (e.g. white), "blue" where the cut-in is displayed in blue, "red" where the cut-in is displayed in red, and "red" where the cut-in is displayed in red. There are four types of "Rainbow Color (Premier)" that confirm that the in is displayed in rainbow color and that it will be a big hit. It has become.

When a pattern with a high degree of expectation for a big win is determined, the cut-in pattern may be displayed by switching to a pattern with a high degree of expectation for a big win after temporarily displaying a pattern with a low degree of expectation for a big win.
Specifically, when "red" has been determined, the display is first performed in "blue" and then switched from "blue" to "red".
Moreover, such switching may be performed step by step to a pattern with a high probability of winning a big hit, or may be switched by skipping one step, such as switching from "normal color" to "red".

(Button pattern determination table)
FIG. 44(a) is a diagram showing a button pattern determination table referred to when determining the button pattern in the tenpai effect. The button pattern determination table is associated with the jackpot lottery result, variation effect pattern type, distribution ratio (%) for each button pattern, and determined button pattern.

Two types of button patterns are set, ie, a "single hit" that allows operating the performance button 35 once, and a "continuous hit" that allows multiple times of operating the performance button 35, and the degree of expectation for a big win. is a single hit < consecutive hits.
Note that the tenpai effect may be performed by releasing a "single button hit" icon or a "continuous button hit" icon in the "second stock effect" described later, or may be performed without going through the "second stock effect". may

(decision production 2 pattern decision table)
FIG. 44(b) is a diagram showing a determination effect 2 pattern determination table referred to when determining a pattern in determination effect 2. FIG. The result of the jackpot lottery, the variation performance pattern type, the distribution ratio (%) for each of the two patterns of the final performance, and the two patterns of the final performance to be determined are associated with the final performance 2 pattern determination table.

Two types of ``single hit'' in which the performance button 35 is allowed to be operated once, and ``continuous hits'' in which the performance button 35 is allowed to be operated a plurality of times are set in the 2 patterns of the determined performance, and a big win is achieved. The degree of expectation is single hit < consecutive hits.
Note that the final effect 2 may be performed by releasing the “single button hit” icon or the “continuous button hit” icon in the “second stock effect” described later, or may be performed without going through the “second stock effect”. may be broken.

(Stock notice effect determination processing)
Next, with reference to FIG. 45, stock announcement effect determination processing of the effect control section 120m will be described. FIG. 45 is a flow chart showing stock announcement effect determination processing in the effect control section 120m.

First, the sub CPU 120a refers to the determined variable effect pattern in step S1444-1. Then, in step S1444-2, it is determined whether or not the low probability non-time-saving gaming state. If it is in the low probability non-time-saving gaming state, the process is moved to step S1444-3, and if it is not in the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state, the process is moved to step S1444-6.

In step S1444-3, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not to execute the first stock announcement using the first stock announcement determination table (see FIG. 46(a)). Then, when it is decided to execute the first stock notice, information indicating that the first stock notice is to be executed is set in a predetermined area of the sub-RAM 120c. The details of this first stock notice determination table will be described later with reference to FIG. 46(a).

In step S1444-4, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not to execute the first stock notice. That is, in step S1444-3, when information indicating execution of the first stock notice is set in a predetermined area of the sub-RAM 120c, it is determined that the first stock notice is to be executed. If the first stock notice is to be executed, the process proceeds to step S1444-5, and if the first stock notice is not to be executed, the current stock notice effect determination process is terminated.

In step S1444-5, the sub CPU 120a performs the first stock announcement effect determination process.
Specifically, whether or not the first stock effect is executed, A process for determining the display mode of the stock icons in the first stock effect is performed. The details of this first stock announcement effect determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S1444-6, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not to execute the second stock notice using the second stock notice determination table (see FIG. 46(b)). Then, when it is decided to execute the second stock notice, information indicating that the second stock notice is to be executed is set in a predetermined area of the sub-RAM 120c. Details of the second stock advance notice determination table will be described later with reference to FIG. 46(b).

In step S1444-7, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not to execute the second stock notice. That is, in step S1444-6, it is determined that the second stock notice is to be executed when information indicating execution of the second stock notice is set in a predetermined area of the sub-RAM 120c. If the second stock notice is to be executed, the process proceeds to step S1444-8, and if the second stock notice is not to be executed, the current stock notice effect determination process is terminated.

In step S1444-8, the sub CPU 120a performs second stock announcement effect determination processing.
Specifically, based on the determined variable effect pattern (the effect configuration determined in the variable effect pattern), etc., the execution/non-execution of the second stock effect, the display mode of the stock icon in the second stock effect, etc. are determined. process for The details of this second stock announcement effect determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In this way, in the case of a low probability non-time-saving gaming state, the first stock notice is executed, and when it is not a low-probability non-time-saving gaming state (for example, a high probability of a time-saving gaming state), the first stock notice is A different second stock notice was targeted for execution.
As a result, different stock notices are executed in the low-probability non-time-saving game state and when not in the low-probability non-time-saving game state, so that a game machine that is less likely to cause boredom can be provided.

(First stock notice decision table)
FIG. 46(a) is a diagram showing a first stock announcement determination table that is referred to when determining the first stock announcement. The result of the jackpot lottery, the variation effect pattern type, the distribution ratio (%) of execution/non-execution, and the execution/non-execution are associated with the first stock notice determination table.

The characteristics of the first stock notice determination table shown in FIG. 46(a) are that the first stock notice is more likely to be executed in the case of a big win than in the case of a big win lottery result, and the degree of expectation for a big win is higher. The point is that the first stock notice is more likely to be executed when a variable performance pattern with a high degree of expectation for a big win is determined than when a low variable performance pattern is determined. By doing so, it is possible to heighten the player's sense of expectation for the execution of the big winning game, and to improve the interest of the game.
Note that the execution/non-execution distribution ratio (%) may be changed arbitrarily. For example, when executing SPSP reach, "execute" may be determined without fail.

(Second stock advance notice decision table)
FIG. 46(b) is a diagram showing a second stock announcement determination table that is referred to when determining the second stock announcement. The result of the jackpot lottery, the type of variation effect pattern, the allocation ratio (%) of execution/non-execution, and the execution/non-execution are associated with the second stock notice determination table.

The characteristics of the second stock notice determination table shown in FIG. 46(b) are that the second stock notice is more likely to be executed in the case of a big win than in the case of a big win lottery result, and the degree of expectation for a big win is higher. The point is that the second stock notice is more likely to be executed when a variable performance pattern with a high degree of expectation for a big win is determined than when a low variable performance pattern is determined. By doing so, it is possible to heighten the player's sense of expectation for the execution of the big winning game, and to improve the interest of the game.
Note that the execution/non-execution distribution ratio (%) may be changed arbitrarily. For example, when executing SPSP reach, "execute" may be determined without fail.

(First stock notice effect determination process)
Next, with reference to FIG. 47, the first stock advance notice effect determination processing of the effect control section 120m will be described. FIG. 47 is a flow chart showing the first stock announcement effect determination process in the effect control section 120m.

First, the sub CPU 120a refers to the determined variation effect pattern in step S1444-5-1. Then, in step S1444-5-2, the icon change scenario (FIG. 35) set in the icon change effect determination process of FIG. 33 is referred to.

In step S1444-5-3, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not to execute the variable icon change effect. That is, based on the icon change scenario referred to in step S1444-5-2, it is determined whether or not the scenario is for executing the variable icon change effect. If the varying icon change effect is to be executed, the process proceeds to step S1444-5-4, and if the varying icon change effect is not to be performed, the process proceeds to step S1444-5-8.

In step S1444-5-4, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not to execute the stock for the variable icon using the stock determination table for the variable icon (see FIG. 48(a)). Then, when it is decided to execute the stock for the variable icon, information indicating execution of the stock for the variable icon is set in a predetermined area of the sub-RAM 120c. The details of this variable icon stock determination table will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S1444-5-5, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not to execute the stock for the variable icon. That is, in step S1444-5-4, if information indicating execution of the stock for the variable icon is set in a predetermined area of the sub-RAM 120c, it is determined that the stock for the variable icon is to be executed. If the variable icon stock is to be executed, the process proceeds to step S1444-5-6, and if the variable icon stock is not to be executed, the process proceeds to step S1444-5-8.

In step S1444-5-6, the sub CPU 120a determines the stock display mode using the stock display mode determination table (see FIG. 50) for the first stock notice effect. When the stock display mode is determined, information indicating the stock display mode is set in a predetermined area of the sub-RAM 120c. The details of the stock display mode determination table for the first stock announcement effect will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S1444-5-7, the sub CPU 120a sets the determined stock advance notice designation command for the variable icon in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c. As a result, the variable icon stock preview effect designating command is transmitted to the image control unit 150 and the frame control board 180, and the first stock preview effect related to the variable icon is executed.

The sub CPU 120a determines in step S1444-5-8 whether or not to execute a title pattern other than the normal color. That is, in step S1443-14 in the jackpot announcement effect determination process of FIG. 39, it is determined whether or not a title pattern other than the normal color has been determined. If the title pattern other than the normal color has been determined, the process proceeds to step S1444-5-9, and if the title pattern other than the normal color has not been determined, the process proceeds to step S1444-5-13.

In step S1444-5-9, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not to execute stock for title presentation effect using the stock determination table for title presentation effect (see FIG. 48(b)). When it is decided to execute the stock for title notice effect, information indicating that the stock for title notice effect is executed is set in a predetermined area of the sub-RAM 120c. The details of the stock determination table for title announcement effects will be described later with reference to FIG. 48(b).

In step S1444-5-10, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not to execute stock for title announcement effect. That is, in step S1444-5-9, when the information indicating that the stock for title notice effect is to be executed is set in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 120c, it is determined that the stock for title notice effect is to be executed. If the stock for title notice effect is to be executed, the process moves to step S1444-5-11, and if the stock for title notice effect is not to be executed, the process moves to step S1444-5-13.

In step S1444-5-11, the sub CPU 120a determines the stock display mode using the stock display mode determination table (see FIG. 50) for the first stock announcement effect. When the stock display mode is determined, information indicating the stock display mode is set in a predetermined area of the sub-RAM 120c.

In step S1444-5-12, the sub CPU 120a sets the determined stock notice effect designating command for the title notice effect in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c. As a result, the stock preview effect designating command for the title preview effect is transmitted to the image control unit 150 and the frame control board 180, and the first stock preview effect related to the title preview effect is executed.

The sub CPU 120a determines in step S1444-5-13 whether or not to execute a cut-in pattern other than the normal color. That is, it is determined whether or not a cut-in pattern other than the normal color has been determined in step S1443-17 in the big hit announcement effect determination process of FIG. If a cut-in pattern other than the normal color has been determined, the process proceeds to step S1444-5-14, and if no cut-in pattern other than the normal color has been determined, the process proceeds to step S1444-5-18. Transfer.

In step S1444-5-14, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the cut-in notice effect stock is executed using the cut-in notice effect stock determination table (see FIG. 48(c)). When it is decided to execute the cut-in notice effect stock, information indicating that the cut-in notice effect stock is executed is set in a predetermined area of the sub-RAM 120c. Details of the cut-in notice effect stock determination table will be described later with reference to FIG. 48(c).

In step S1444-5-15, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not to execute stock for cut-in notice effect. That is, in step S1444-5-14, when information indicating execution of stock for cut-in notice effect is set in a predetermined area of sub-RAM 120c, it is determined to execute stock for cut-in notice effect. If the cut-in notice effect stock is to be executed, the process proceeds to step S1444-5-16, and if the cut-in notice effect stock is not to be executed, the process proceeds to step S1444-5-18.

In step S1444-5-16, the sub CPU 120a determines the stock display mode using the stock display mode determination table (see FIG. 50) for the first stock announcement effect. When the stock display mode is determined, information indicating the stock display mode is set in a predetermined area of the sub-RAM 120c.

In step S1444-5-17, the sub CPU 120a sets the determined stock notice effect designating command for the cut-in notice effect in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c. As a result, the stock preview effect designating command for the cut-in preview effect is transmitted to the image control unit 150 and the frame control board 180, and the first stock preview effect related to the cut-in preview effect is executed.

In step S1444-5-18, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not to execute SP reach or SPSP reach effect. That is, it is determined whether or not SP ready-to-win or SPSP ready-to-win effects are to be executed based on the referenced variable effect pattern. If the SP ready-to-win or the SPSP ready-to-win effect is to be executed, the process proceeds to step S1444-5-19, and if the SP ready-to-win or the SPSP ready-to-win effect is not to be executed, the current first stock notice effect determination process is terminated.

In step S1444-5-19, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the stock for development effect is executed using the stock determination table for development effect (see FIG. 49(a)). Then, when it is decided to execute the stock for development effect, information indicating that the stock for development effect is executed is set in a predetermined area of the sub-RAM 120c. The details of the development effect stock determination table will be described later with reference to FIG. 49(a).

It should be noted that the development effect is a effect executed when developing from normal reach to SP reach or from normal reach to SP reach. Specifically, it is an effect for notifying that the game has progressed to SP reach or SP SP reach by moving the first decorative member 33a (effect accessory) downward after once notifying that the game has failed in normal reach.

In step S1444-5-20, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not to execute the development effect stock. That is, in step S1444-5-19, when the information indicating that the stock for development effect is to be executed is set in the predetermined area of the sub RAM 120c, it is determined that the stock for development effect is to be executed. If the stock for development effect is to be executed, the process is shifted to step S1444-5-21.

In step S1444-5-21, the sub CPU 120a determines the stock display mode using the stock display mode determination table (see FIG. 50) for the first stock announcement effect. When the stock display mode is determined, information indicating the stock display mode is set in a predetermined area of the sub-RAM 120c.

In step S1444-5-22, the sub CPU 120a sets the determined stock advance notice effect designation command for the development effect in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c. As a result, the stock preview effect designating command for the development effect is transmitted to the image control section 150 and the frame control board 180, and the first stock preview effect relating to the development effect is executed.

In step S1444-5-23, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the stock for the final effect 1 is executed using the stock determination table for the final effect 1 (see FIG. 49(b)). Then, when it is decided to execute the stock for the decided effect 1, information indicating that the stock for the decided effect 1 is executed is set in a predetermined area of the sub-RAM 120c. The details of the stock determination table for the final effect 1 will be described later with reference to FIG. 49(b).

It should be noted that the "determined effect 1" is an effect that is executed in a variable effect pattern that executes SP reach or SPSP reach in the variable effect pattern determination table (low probability non-time-saving game state) of Fig. 37 .
Specifically, by having the player operate the effect button 35 in the final phase of SP reach or SP reach, it is an effect to notify the result of the jackpot lottery, and as a suggestive event (see FIG. 56 etc.) of the timer effect to be described later. is also determined.
In addition, the "decision effect 1" includes a decision effect 1 (for example, FIG. 69 (w)) that is executed when the jackpot lottery result is a big hit, and a decision effect 1 (for example, FIG. 69 (w)) that is executed when the jackpot lottery result is a loss. For example, there is FIG. 70 (w-1)). In addition, hereinafter, these may be collectively referred to simply as "determined effect 1".

The sub CPU 120a determines in step S1444-5-24 whether or not the stock for the decision effect 1 is executed. That is, in step S1444-5-23, when the information indicating that the stock for determination effect 1 is to be executed is set in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 120c, it is determined that the stock for determination effect 1 is to be executed. If the stock for the determined effect 1 is to be executed, the process proceeds to step S1444-5-25, and if the stock for the determined effect 1 is not to be executed, the current first stock notice effect determination process is terminated.

In step S1444-5-25, the sub CPU 120a determines the stock display mode using the stock display mode determination table (see FIG. 50) for the first stock announcement effect. When the stock display mode is determined, information indicating the stock display mode is set in a predetermined area of the sub-RAM 120c.

In step S1444-5-26, the sub CPU 120a sets the determined stock advance notice effect designation command for the determined effect 1 to the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c. As a result, the stock preview effect specifying command for the final effect 1 is transmitted to the image control unit 150 and the frame control board 180, and the first stock preview effect related to the final effect 1 is executed.

(Stock determination table for the relevant variable icon)
FIG. 48(a) is a diagram showing the variable icon stock determination table referred to when determining the variable icon stock. The variable icon stock determination table is associated with the final display mode of the icon, the allocation ratio (%) of execution/non-execution, and execution/non-execution.

A feature of the variable icon stock determination table shown in FIG. 48(a) is that the variable icon stock is more likely to be executed when an icon final display mode with a high expectation of a big win is determined. be done. By doing so, it is possible to heighten the player's sense of expectation for the execution of the big winning game, and to improve the interest of the game.

(Stock decision table for title announcement effect)
FIG. 48(b) is a diagram showing a title notice effect stock determination table referred to when determining the title notice effect stock. Title patterns, execution/non-execution allocation ratios (%), and execution/non-execution are associated with the title announcement effect stock determination table.

A feature of the stock determination table for title notice effect shown in FIG. 48(b) is that the stock for title notice effect is more likely to be executed when a title pattern with a high degree of expectation for a big win is determined. By doing so, it is possible to heighten the player's sense of expectation for the execution of the big winning game, and to improve the interest of the game.

(Stock decision table for cut-in notice effect)
FIG. 48(c) is a diagram showing a cut-in notice effect stock determination table referred to when deciding cut-in notice effect stocks. A cut-in pattern, a distribution ratio (%) of execution/non-execution, and execution/non-execution are associated with the cut-in notice effect stock determination table.

As a feature of the stock determination table for cut-in notice effect shown in FIG. 48(c), stock for cut-in notice effect is more likely to be executed when a cut-in pattern with high expectation of big win is determined. mentioned. By doing so, it is possible to heighten the player's sense of expectation for the execution of the big winning game, and to improve the interest of the game.

(Stock decision table for development production)
FIG. 49(a) is a diagram showing a development effect stock determination table referred to when determining a development effect stock. The development effect stock determination table is associated with variable effect patterns, execution/non-execution distribution ratio (%), and execution/non-execution.

The characteristics of the stock determination table for development effect shown in FIG. 49(a) are that the stock for development effect is more likely to be executed in the case of a big win than in the case of a loss in the jackpot lottery result, and the degree of expectation for a big win is higher. One of the points is that the development performance stock is more likely to be executed when a higher variable performance pattern is determined. By doing so, it is possible to heighten the player's sense of expectation for the execution of the big winning game, and to improve the interest of the game.
Note that the execution/non-execution distribution ratio (%) may be changed arbitrarily. For example, when executing SPSP reach, "execute" may be determined without fail.

(Stock decision table for decision production 1)
FIG. 49(b) is a diagram showing a stock determination table for final effect 1, which is referred to when determining the stock for final effect 1. FIG. The stock determination table for the determined effect 1 is associated with the variable effect pattern, the distribution ratio (%) of execution/non-execution, and the execution/non-execution.

As a characteristic of the stock determination table for decision effect 1 shown in FIG. 49(b), the stock for decision effect 1 is executed more when SP reach is determined than when SP reach is decided. There is a point that it is easy to be By doing so, it is possible to heighten the player's sense of expectation for the execution of the big winning game, and to improve the interest of the game.
Note that the execution/non-execution distribution ratio (%) may be changed arbitrarily. For example, when executing SPSP reach, "execute" may be determined without fail.

(Stock display mode determination table for the first stock notice effect)
FIG. 50 is a diagram showing a stock display mode determination table for the first stock notice effect, which is referred to when determining the stock display mode for the first stock notice effect. The stock display mode determination table of the first stock notice effect is associated with the jackpot lottery result, the variation effect pattern type, the distribution ratio (%) of the display mode, and the display mode.
Note that the stock display mode is the display mode of the icon displayed on the image display device 31 when it is decided to execute any stock in FIG. , for example, as a "partially clear" icon such as "color up" shown in FIG. 66(a), or as shown in FIG. It is displayed with an "unclear" icon such as "?". Definitions of "clear", "partially clear", and "unclear" will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the stock display mode determination table for the first stock announcement effect in FIG. 50, either "clear or partially clear" or "unclear" is determined as the stock display mode. In addition, regardless of the type of variation effect pattern, "clear or partially clear" and "unclear" are equally determined.
For example, if it is decided to execute the variable icon stock in FIG. 47 and "clear or partially clear" is decided in FIG. 50, the icon "color UP" shown in FIG. On the other hand, if "unclear" is determined in FIG. 50, the icon "?" shown in FIG. When the time to release the icons comes, the icon "color up" appears from the icon "?".
Also, for example, if it is decided to execute the stock for cut-in effect in FIG. 47 and "clear or partially clear" is decided in FIG. 50, the icon "button push" shown in FIG. . On the other hand, if "unclear" is determined in FIG. 50, the icon "?" shown in FIG. When the time to release the icon arrives, the icon "button push" appears from the icon "?".
Also, for example, if it is decided to execute the development effect stock in FIG. 47 and "clear or partially clear" is decided in FIG. 50, the icon "gimmick activation" shown in FIG. On the other hand, if "unclear" is determined in FIG. 50, the icon "?" shown in FIG. In addition, when the time to release the icon comes, the icon "gimmick activation" appears from the icon "?".

(Second Stock Announcement Effect Decision Processing)
Next, with reference to FIG. 51, the second stock advance notice effect determination processing of the effect control section 120m will be described. FIG. 51 is a flow chart showing second stock announcement effect determination processing in the effect control section 120m.

First, the sub CPU 120a refers to the determined variation effect pattern in step S1444-8-1. Then, in step S1444-8-2, it is determined whether or not to execute the tenpai effect. That is, as a result of referring to the variable performance pattern, it is determined that the tenpai performance is to be executed when the variable performance pattern is for executing the tenpai performance. If the tenpai effect is to be executed, the process moves to step S1444-8-3, and if the tenpai effect is not to be executed, the process moves to step S1444-8-7.

In step S1444-8-3, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the stock for tenpai effect is executed using the stock determination table for tenpai effect (see FIG. 52(a)). When it is decided to execute the stock for tenpai effect, information indicating that the stock for tenpai effect is to be executed is set in a predetermined area of the sub-RAM 120c. The details of the stock determination table for ten pie effect will be described later with reference to FIG. 52(a).

In step S1444-8-4, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not to execute the stock for tenpai effect. That is, in step S1444-8-3, it is determined that the stock for ten-pie effect is to be executed when information indicating that the stock for ten-pie effect is to be executed is set in a predetermined area of the sub-RAM 120c. If the stock for tenpie effect is to be executed, the process proceeds to step S1444-8-5, and if the stock for tenpie effect is not to be executed, the process is moved to step S1444-8-7.

In step S1444-8-5, the sub CPU 120a determines the stock display mode using the stock display mode determination table for the tenpai effect (see FIG. 52(b)). When the stock display mode is determined, information indicating the stock display mode is set in a predetermined area of the sub-RAM 120c. The details of the stock display mode determination table for the tenpai effect will be described later with reference to FIG. 52(b).

In step S1444-8-6, the sub CPU 120a sets the determined stock advance notice effect specifying command for the tenpai effect in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c. As a result, the stock preview effect designating command for the tenpai effect is transmitted to the image control unit 150 and the frame control board 180, and the second stock preview effect related to the tenpai effect is executed.

In step S1444-8-7, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not to execute SP reach or SPSP reach effect. That is, it is determined whether or not SP ready-to-win or SPSP ready-to-win effects are to be executed based on the referenced variable effect pattern. If the SP ready-to-win or the SPSP ready-to-win effect is to be executed, the process proceeds to step S1444-8-8, and if the SP ready-to-win or the SPSP ready-to-win effect is not to be executed, the current second stock notice effect determination process is terminated.

The sub CPU 120a determines whether or not to execute the decision effect 2 in step S1444-8-8. That is, as a result of referring to the variable performance pattern, it is determined whether or not it is the variable performance pattern (variable performance patterns 58, 59, 66, 67, 81, 82, 89, 90) for executing the fixed performance 2. If the decision effect 2 is to be executed, the process is moved to step S1444-8-9, and if the decision effect 2 is not to be executed, the process is moved to step S1444-8-13.

In step S1444-8-9, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the stock for the final effect 2 is executed using the stock determination table for the final effect 2 (see FIG. 53(a)). Then, when it is decided to execute the stock for the determined effect 2, information indicating that the stock for the determined effect 2 is executed is set in a predetermined area of the sub-RAM 120c. The details of the stock determination table for the final effect 2 will be described later with reference to FIG. 53(a).

In step S1444-8-10, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the stock for the decision effect 2 is executed. That is, in step S1444-8-9, when information indicating that the stock for determination effect 2 is to be executed is set in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 120c, it is determined that the stock for determination effect 2 is to be executed. If the stock for determination effect 2 is to be executed, the process is moved to step S1444-8-11, and if the stock for determination effect 2 is not to be executed, the process is moved to step S1444-8-13.

In step S1444-8-11, the sub CPU 120a determines the display mode of the stock using the stock display mode determination table (see FIG. 53(b)) of the final effect 2. FIG. When the stock display mode is determined, information indicating the stock display mode is set in a predetermined area of the sub-RAM 120c. The details of the stock display mode determination table for the final effect 2 will be described later with reference to FIG. 53(b).

In step S1444-8-12, the sub CPU 120a sets the determined stock advance notice effect specification command for the determined effect 2 in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c. As a result, the stock preview effect specifying command for the final effect 2 is transmitted to the image control unit 150 and the frame control board 180, and the second stock preview effect related to the final effect 2 is executed.

The sub CPU 120a determines in step S1444-8-13 whether or not there is a discrepancy between the actual operation mode and the display mode. If it is determined that there is a discrepancy between the actual operation mode and the display mode, the process proceeds to step S1444-8-14, and if it is determined that there is no discrepancy between the actual operation mode and the display mode, this second 2 stock notice effect determination processing is ended.
The discrepancy between the actual operation mode and the display mode will be described later with reference to FIGS. ” may be determined. In other words, the display mode of the icon displayed on the image display device 31 may be "single hit" even though the actual operation mode is "continuous hit". As described above, the degree of expectation for a big win of a button pattern has a relationship of single hit < consecutive hits, and the player desires that "successive hits" be displayed as an icon. Therefore, even if the actual operation mode is "multi-hit", "single-hit" is displayed once, and then the display mode is changed to "multi-hit" by elevating the icon. As a result, it is possible to impart surprise to the player, and to further improve the amusement of the game.

In step S1444-8-14, the sub CPU 120a sets the determined stock display mode change effect designating command in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c. As a result, the fixed stock display mode change effect designating command is transmitted to the image control unit 150 and the frame control board 180, and the second stock announcement effect related to the tenpai effect is executed.

(Stock decision table for tenpai production)
FIG. 52(a) is a diagram showing a ten-pie effect stock determination table referred to when determining the ten-pie effect stock. Button patterns, execution/non-execution distribution ratios (%), and execution/non-execution are associated with the ten-pie effect stock determination table.

The characteristic of the ten-pie effect stock determination table shown in FIG. 52(a) is that the ten-pie effect stock is more likely to be executed when repeated hits are determined than when single hits are determined. mentioned. By doing so, it is possible to heighten the player's sense of expectation for the execution of the big winning game, and to improve the interest of the game.
Note that the execution/non-execution distribution ratio (%) may be changed arbitrarily. For example, when executing repeated hits, "execute" may be always determined.

(Stock display mode determination table for tenpai production)
FIG. 52(b) is a diagram showing a stock display mode determination table for the tenpai effect, which is referred to when determining the stock display mode for the tenpai effect. Button patterns, jackpot lottery results, fluctuation effect patterns, distribution ratios (%) of display modes, and display modes are associated with the stock display mode determination table for tenpai effects.

A feature of the ten-pie effect stock display mode determination table shown in FIG. do not have. On the other hand, when repeated hits are determined as the button pattern, single hits and repeated hits are determined as the display mode. Note that if the button pattern is set to be repeated and the display mode is set to be single hit, it will be determined in step S1444-8-13 of FIG. 51 that there is a discrepancy.
Further, when repeated hits are determined as the button pattern, single hits are more likely to be decided when the jackpot lottery result is a big win than when a loss is made. That is, when the effect of changing the icon from the single-hit icon to the repeated-hit icon is accompanied, it is possible to make the player expect that a big winning game will be given.

(Stock decision table for decision effect 2)
FIG. 53(a) is a diagram showing a stock determination table for final effect 2, which is referred to when determining the stock for final effect 2. FIG. The stock determination table for the decision effect 2 is associated with the decision effect 2 pattern, the distribution ratio (%) of execution/non-execution, and execution/non-execution.

As a feature of the stock determination table for the final effect 2 shown in FIG. 53(a), the stock for the final effect 2 is more likely to be executed when the continuous hit is determined than when the single hit is determined. points. By doing so, it is possible to heighten the player's sense of expectation for the execution of the big winning game, and to improve the interest of the game.
Note that the execution/non-execution distribution ratio (%) may be changed arbitrarily. For example, when executing repeated hits, "execute" may be always determined.

(Stock display mode determination table for decision effect 2)
FIG. 53(b) is a diagram showing a stock display mode determination table for the final effect 2, which is referred to when determining the stock display mode for the final effect 2. FIG. The stock display mode determination table of the determined effect 2 is associated with the determined effect 2 pattern, the jackpot lottery result, the variable effect pattern type, the distribution ratio (%) of the display mode, and the display mode.

As a feature of the stock display mode determination table for the final effect 2 shown in FIG. never do. On the other hand, when repeated hits are determined as the second pattern of the final effect, single hits and repeated hits are determined as display modes. It should be noted that if the single hit is determined as the display mode when the consecutive hits are determined as the 2nd pattern of the final effect, it will be determined that there is a discrepancy in step S1444-8-13 of FIG. 51 described above.
In addition, when repeated hits are determined as the 2 patterns of the final effect, single hits are more likely to be decided when the jackpot lottery result is a big win than when a loss is made. That is, when the effect of changing the icon from the single-hit icon to the repeated-hit icon is accompanied, it is possible to make the player expect that a big winning game will be given.

(Timer effect determination process)
Next, the timer effect determination processing of the effect control section 120m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 54 is a flow chart showing timer effect determination processing in the effect control section 120m.

First, in step S1445-1, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the current gaming state is a low-probability non-time-saving gaming state. If it is in the low probability non-time-saving gaming state, the process proceeds to step S1445-2, and if it is not in the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state, this timer effect determination processing is terminated. That is, the timer effect is a effect executed when the low probability non-time-saving game state.
It should be noted that the timer effect may be executed when it is not in the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state.

In step S1445-2, the sub CPU 120a refers to the change scenario of the icon corresponding to the variable icon, and determines in step S1445-3 whether or not the variable icon change effect is to be executed. If the icon change effect is to be executed, the process moves to step S1445-4, and if the icon change effect is not to be executed, the process moves to step S1445-9.

In step S1445-4, the sub CPU 120a uses the variable timer count determination table (see FIG. 55(a)) to determine the number of variable timer effects to be executed during the current variable effect (“0 times” or “1 time”). ). Specifically, the final icon display mode and the like of the variable icon are collated. The details of this change timer frequency determination table will be described later with reference to FIG. 55(a).

Note that the changing timer effect is an effect that suggests that the changing icon changing effect is executed and the timing at which the changing icon changing effect is executed, but at the time the changing timer effect is executed It is difficult for the player to determine whether or not the variable timer effect is being performed, and the player can determine that the variable timer effect is being performed when the display mode of the variable icon changes.

In step S1445-5, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the determined number of changing timer effects is to execute the changing timer effects. If the changing timer effect is to be executed (the number of changing timer effects is "1 time"), the process proceeds to step S1445-6, and the changing timer effect is not to be executed (the number of changing timer effects is "0"). times”), the process moves to step S1445-9.

In step S1445-6, the sub CPU 120a determines an icon change for a suggestive event suggested by a variable timer effect, and determines a variable timer for a timer type classified according to timer type and length.

In addition to the icon change, the suggestive events include normal reach, simulated run, zone effect, heat zone effect, next notice effect, SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect, full rotation reach effect, final effect 1, jackpot pattern stop, etc. .

In addition to variable timers, timer types include a short timer that is a short timer time category, a middle timer that is a long timer time category, a long timer that is a long timer time category, and the like. Note that the timer times set according to the four types of timers are variable timer=short timer<middle timer<long timer.

The type of timer time of the change timer was the same as the short timer (5 seconds, 6 seconds, and 7 seconds), but the same timer time type as the middle timer and long timer (15 seconds, 20 seconds) seconds, 35 seconds, 40 seconds, 45 seconds, 50 seconds and 55 seconds).

In step S1445-7, the sub CPU 120a determines the timer update pattern (effect mode) in the variable timer effect using the update pattern determination table (see FIG. 58). Specifically, the timer type, the jackpot lottery result, and the like are checked against the update pattern determination table. The details of this update pattern determination table will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S1445-8, the sub CPU 120a sets a suggested event and a timer effect specifying command indicating an update pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c. As a result, the timer effect specifying command is transmitted to the image control unit 150 and the frame control board 180, and processing for executing the variable timer effect during the variable effect is performed.

The sub CPU 120a refers to the current variation effect pattern in step S1445-9, and in step S1445-10, a reach effect equal to or higher than the SP reach effect (SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect, full rotation reach effect) is executed. Determine whether or not When the ready-to-win effect equal to or higher than the SP ready-to-win effect is executed, the processing is shifted to step S1445-11, and when the ready-to-win effect equal to or greater than the SP ready-to-win effect is not executed, the current timer effect determination processing is terminated.

In step S1445-11, the sub CPU 120a uses the event timer count determination table (see FIG. 55(b)) to determine the number of event timer effects (“0 times” to “2 times”) to be executed during the current variable effect. ). Specifically, the big hit lottery result, variation effect pattern, etc., are collated with the event timer frequency determination table. The details of this event timer frequency determination table will be described later with reference to FIG. 55(b).

The event timer effect is the occurrence of any of a plurality of events (excluding icon changes) that make you expect that the jackpot game will be executed in the process of executing the variable effect, and the effect that suggests the timing of the event occurrence. However, it is difficult for the player to determine the type of event when the event timer effect is executed, and the type of event can be determined when the event occurs.

Since the variable timer effect and the event timer effect described above share the same execution mode during the execution of each timer effect, which timer effect is being executed at the time when various timer effects are executed. is difficult for the player to determine.

In step S1445-12, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the determined number of times of the event timer effect is to execute the event timer effect. If the event timer effect is to be executed (the number of times of the event timer effect is "1 time" or "2 times"), the process moves to step S1445-13, and the event timer effect is not to be executed (event timer effect is "0 times"), the current timer effect determination process is terminated.

In step S1445-13, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the determined number of event timer effects is one. If it is once, the process moves to step S1445-14, and if it is twice instead of once, the process moves to step S1445-17.

In step S1445-14, the sub CPU 120a uses the suggested event determination table for one timer (see FIG. 56) to determine the suggested event suggested by the event timer effect and the timer type classified according to the type and length of the timer. to decide. Specifically, the variation performance pattern and the like are collated with the suggestive event determination table for one-time timer. Details of the suggested event determination table for one timer will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S1445-15, the sub CPU 120a determines the timer update pattern (drawing mode) in the event timer effect using the update pattern determination table (see FIG. 58). Specifically, the timer type, the jackpot lottery result, and the like are checked against the update pattern determination table.

In step S1445-15, the sub CPU 120a sets a suggestive event and a timer effect designation command indicating an update pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c, and terminates the current timer effect determination process. As a result, the timer effect designation command is transmitted to the image control unit 150 and the frame control board 180, and processing for executing the event timer effect during the variable effect is performed.

In step S1445-17, the sub CPU 120a uses the first suggested event determination table for two timers (see FIG. 57(a)) to determine the suggested event suggested by the first event timer effect and the timer effect. Determines the timer type, which is classified by type and length. Specifically, the variation effect pattern and the like are collated with the first suggested event determination table for two timers. The details of the first suggested event determination table for two timers will be described later with reference to FIG. 57(a).

In step S1445-18, the sub CPU 120a determines the timer update pattern (drawing mode) in the first event timer effect using the update pattern determination table (see FIG. 58). Specifically, the timer type, the jackpot lottery result, and the like are checked against the update pattern determination table.

In step S1445-19, the sub CPU 120a sets a suggested event and a timer effect specifying command indicating an update pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c. As a result, the timer effect designation command is transmitted to the image control unit 150 and the frame control board 180, and processing for executing the first event timer effect during the variable effect is performed.

In step S1445-20, the sub CPU 120a uses the second suggested event determination table for two timers (see FIG. 57(b)) to determine the suggested event suggested by the second event timer effect and the timer. Determines the timer type classified by length. Specifically, the variation performance pattern and the like are collated with the second suggestive event determination table for two timers. The details of the second suggested event determination table for the second timer will be described later with reference to FIG. 57(b).

In step S1445-21, the sub CPU 120a determines the timer update pattern (effect mode) in the second event timer effect using the update pattern determination table (see FIG. 58). Specifically, the timer type, the jackpot lottery result, and the like are checked against the update pattern determination table.

In step S1445-22, the sub CPU 120a sets a suggested event and a timer effect specifying command indicating an update pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c, and terminates the current timer effect determination process. As a result, the timer effect designation command is transmitted to the image control unit 150 and the frame control board 180, and the process for executing the second event timer effect during the variable effect is performed.

(Change timer count determination table)
FIG. 55(a) is a diagram showing a changing timer count determination table referred to when determining the number of times of changing timer effects to be executed during a varying effect. The variable timer frequency determination table is associated with the final display mode of the icon, the distribution ratio (%) for each frequency of the variable timer effect, and the determined frequency of the variable timer effect.

The number of times of the changing timer effect is set to two types, ie, "0 time" that the changing timer effect is not executed, and "1 time" that the changing timer effect is executed.
The number of times of changing timer effect is not limited to the type of this embodiment, and may be three types including the case where changing timer effect is executed twice, or may be executed more times.

A feature of the changing timer frequency determination table shown in FIG. 55(a) is that the higher the degree of expectation for a big win in the final display mode of the variable icon, the easier it is for the changing timer effect to be executed. By doing so, it is possible to effectively announce that the icon will change to the variable icon with a high degree of expectation for a big win, thereby making it possible to improve the amusement of the game.
It should be noted that as the final display mode of the variable icon increases the likelihood of a big win, the execution of the changing timer effect may be made more difficult.

(Event timer count determination table)
FIG. 55(b) is a diagram showing an event timer count determination table referred to when determining the number of event timer effects to be executed during the variable effect. The event timer number determination table is associated with the jackpot lottery result, variable effect pattern, distribution ratio (%) for each number of event timer effects, and the determined number of event timer effects.

The number of times of the event timer effect is "0 times", which means that the event timer effect is not executed, "1 time", which means that the event timer effect is executed once, and the event timer effect is executed twice. Three types of "twice" are set.

The first feature of the event timer frequency determination table shown in FIG. 55(b) is that the event timer performance is more likely to be executed in the case of a big win than in the case of a loss in the big win lottery result, and the degree of expectation for the big win. The event timer effect is more likely to be executed when a ready-to-win effect with a high expectation of a big win is executed than when a ready-to-win effect with a low value is executed. By doing so, it is possible to heighten the player's sense of expectation for the execution of the big winning game, and to improve the interest of the game.

The second feature of the event timer count determination table shown in FIG. 55(b) is that the number of times the event timer effect is executed tends to increase when the jackpot lottery result is a big win than when the jackpot lottery result is a loss. be done. By doing so, it is possible to attract the player's interest in the number of executions of the event timer effect, and to improve the amusement of the game.

As a third feature of the event timer frequency determination table shown in FIG. 55(b), the ready-to-win effect with a high expectation of big win is executed more than the ready-to-win effect with a low expectation of big win. , the number of times the event timer effect is executed tends to increase. By doing so, it is possible to heighten the player's sense of expectation for the execution of the big winning game, and to improve the interest of the game.

(Suggestion event determination table for one timer)
FIG. 56 is a diagram showing a suggestive event in the case of executing the event timer effect once during the variable effect, and a suggestive event determination table for one-time timer referred to when determining the timer type. The suggestive event determination table for one-time timer is associated with a variable effect pattern, a distribution ratio (%) for each suggestive event, a suggestive event to be determined, and a timer type.

Nine kinds of suggestive events are set: normal reach, simulated run, zone effect, next notice effect, SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect, all-rotation reach effect, final effect 1, and jackpot symbol stop.

In addition, three timer types are set as timer types: a short timer that is a short timer time category, a middle timer that is a long timer time category, and a long timer that is a long timer time category. Note that the timer times set according to the three types of timers are short timer<middle timer<long timer.

A first feature of the suggestive event determination table for one-time timer shown in FIG. 56 is that the types of suggested events are set differently according to the variable effect pattern. By doing so, it is possible to increase the variation of the timer effect, prevent the player from getting bored, and improve the interest of the game.

As a second feature of the suggested event determination table for one-time timer shown in FIG. 56, an event (for example, a pseudo A series, zone effect) is more likely to be determined as a suggestive event than an event (for example, SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect, final effect 1) executed at a later time of variable effect. By doing so, the expectation of the player can be improved for a long period of time, and the interest in the game can be improved.

As a third feature of the suggestive event determination table for one-time timer shown in FIG. 56, an event (for example, pseudo-run, zone effect) is executed at an early stage of the variable effect pattern with a higher expectation of a big hit. An event (for example, SP ready-to-win effect, SPSP ready-to-win effect, final effect 1) executed at a later time of variable effect is more likely to be determined as a suggestive event. By doing so, the expectation of the player can be improved for a long period of time, and the interest in the game can be improved.

As a fourth feature of the suggested event determination table for one-time timer shown in FIG. The higher the degree, the easier it is for the long timer to be determined as the timer type). By doing so, the longer the timer time in the timer effect is, the higher the expectation of the big win becomes, so that the player will have a sense of expectation for the length of the timer time, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. becomes.

The fifth feature of the suggestive event determination table for one-time timer shown in FIG. When an event timer effect suggesting the occurrence of a specific event (determining effect 1) is executed, the effect button 35 is pressed in the final phase (final stage) of the variable effect, rather than when the suggesting event timer effect is executed. is likely to be in a special state. By doing so, it is possible to heighten the player's sense of expectation as to which type of event is the suggestive event, and to improve the amusement of the game.

As a sixth feature of the suggestive event determination table for one-time timer shown in FIG. 56, the final phase of the variable effect is more pronounced when the middle timer is determined than when the short timer is determined as the timer type. The point is that the production button 35 tends to be in a special state (protruding state) in (final stage). By doing so, it is possible to heighten the player's sense of anticipation regarding the length of the timer time, and to improve the amusement of the game.

As a seventh feature of the suggestive event determination table for one-time timer shown in FIG. 56, the final phase of the variable effect ( The point is that the production button 35 tends to be in a special state (protruding state) in the final stage). By doing so, it is possible to heighten the player's sense of anticipation regarding the length of the timer time, and to improve the amusement of the game.

(Suggestion event determination table for timer 2 times)
FIG. 57 is a diagram showing a suggestive event when the event timer effect is executed twice during the variable effect, and a suggestive event determination table for two timers referred to when determining the timer type. The suggestive event determination table for two timers is associated with a variable effect pattern, a distribution ratio (%) for each suggestive event, a suggested event to be determined, and a timer type.

FIG. 57(a) is a diagram showing the first suggested event determination table for two timers for determining the type of the first suggested event and the type of the timer type, and FIG. ) is a diagram showing a second suggested event determination table for two timers for determining the type of the second suggested event and the type of timer type.

There are 10 types of suggestive events: normal reach, 1st pseudo-run, 2nd pseudo-run, zone production, 1st heat zone production, next notice production, SPSP reach production, decision production 1, full rotation reach production, and jackpot pattern stop. is set.

In addition, three timer types are set as timer types: a short timer that is a short timer time category, a middle timer that is a long timer time category, and a long timer that is a long timer time category. Note that the timer times set according to the three types of timers are short timer<middle timer<long timer.

A first feature of the suggestive event determination table for two timers shown in FIG. 57 is that the kind of suggested event is set differently according to the variable effect pattern. By doing so, it is possible to increase the variation of the timer effect, prevent the player from getting bored, and improve the interest of the game.

Also, as a second feature of the suggested event determination table for two times of the timer shown in FIG. One of the points is that both of the events that are executed at the late stage of the variable performance are likely to be determined as suggestive events. By doing so, the expectation of the player can be improved for a long period of time, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Also, as a third feature of the suggested event determination table for two timers shown in FIG. 57, the timer type for which a longer timer time is set is more likely to be determined for a variable effect pattern with a higher expectation for a big win ( A long timer is more likely to be determined as a timer type as the degree of expectation for a big hit is higher). By doing so, the longer the timer time in the timer effect is, the higher the expectation of the big win becomes, so that the player will have a sense of expectation for the length of the timer time, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. becomes.

In addition, as a fourth feature of the suggestive event determination table for timer 2 times shown in FIG. 57, a specific When the event timer effect suggesting the occurrence of the event (decisive effect 1) is executed, the effect button 35 is more likely to be in a special state in the final phase (final stage) of the variable effect. By doing so, it is possible to heighten the player's sense of expectation as to which type of event is the suggestive event, and to improve the amusement of the game.

A fifth feature of the suggested event determination table for two timers shown in FIG. However, there is a point that the production button 35 tends to be in a special state (protruding state) in the final phase (final stage) of the variable production. By doing so, it is possible to heighten the player's sense of anticipation regarding the length of the timer time, and to improve the amusement of the game.

(Update pattern determination table)
FIG. 58 is a diagram showing an update pattern determination table referred to when determining a timer update pattern (effect mode). The update pattern determination table is associated with the timer type, jackpot lottery result, distribution ratio (%) for each update pattern, and determined update pattern. The timer display position and whether or not the standby display indicating that the execution of the timer effect is waiting is described.

"Normal pattern" is a normal update pattern in which the timer displayed in a predetermined area of the image display device 31 is subtracted by 1 from the initial number of seconds until it reaches 0 seconds.
The "special pattern" means that the timer displayed in a predetermined area of the image display device 31 is decremented by 1 from the initial number of seconds until it reaches 0 seconds, and then the timer (number of seconds) is rewound. This is a special update pattern in which 1 is decremented until 0 seconds is reached again.

The expected degree of jackpot for each update pattern corresponding to the variable timer is normal pattern 1<normal pattern 2<normal pattern 3.
The degree of expectation for a big win for each update pattern corresponding to the short timer is normal pattern 5<normal pattern 6<normal pattern 7.
The expected degree of jackpot for each update pattern corresponding to the middle timer is normal pattern 11<normal pattern 12<normal pattern 13.
The expected degree of jackpot for each update pattern corresponding to the long timer is normal pattern 21<normal pattern 22<normal pattern 23<normal pattern 24<normal pattern 25<special pattern 1<normal pattern 26<normal pattern 27<special pattern 2< A normal pattern 28 is provided.

In this way, in the timer effect, a plurality of timer times (update patterns) are set. 35 operation valid period, stop display of the jackpot pattern, etc.) and the timing of the occurrence of a predetermined event, so the count value is any timer time (update pattern) is counted up to the final reaching point (0 seconds in this embodiment).

The first feature of the update pattern determination table shown in FIG. 58 is that regardless of the timer type, there is an update pattern in which the timer time is longer in the case of a big win than in the case of a loss in the big win lottery result. points that are easy to determine. By doing so, the longer the timer time in the timer effect is, the higher the expectation of the big win becomes, so that the player will have a sense of expectation for the length of the timer time, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. becomes.

A second feature of the update pattern determination table shown in FIG. 58 is that even if the timer time is the same, the degree of expectation for a big win differs depending on the display mode (character color) of the timer. By doing so, it is possible to heighten the player's sense of expectation for the display mode of the timer, and to improve the amusement of the game. Specifically, the degree of expectation for a big win related to the display mode (character color) of the timer is white<blue<red<rainbow (confirmed big win).

A third feature of the update pattern determination table shown in FIG. 58 is that the timer type for which a longer timer time is determined has more timer display modes (character colors). By doing so, it is possible to give an impression that the degree of expectation for a big win is higher for a timer type in which a longer timer time is determined, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Although the character color has been exemplified as the display mode of the timer, a font may be used instead of the character color, a decoration portion may be used to decorate the timer, or a combination thereof may be used.

As a fourth feature of the update pattern determination table shown in FIG. 58, a plurality of character colors (white, blue, red, rainbow) are set as the display mode of the timer. The same colors as some of the icon color types (white, blue, green, red, zebra, rainbow) set as the display mode are set. That is, the icon color set as the final icon display mode includes all the character colors set as the timer display mode. By doing so, it becomes easy to understand which character color timer has a high expectation for a big win, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.
Also, the permutation of the degree of expectation of a big win indicated by the color type is common between the icon color type set as the icon final display mode and the character color type set as the timer display mode.

The character color type set as the timer display mode and the icon color type set as the icon final display mode may be the same type.

In addition to the final display mode of the icon, all the character colors set as the display mode of the timer, or Some may set the same color. Also in this case, it is preferable that the permutation of the degree of expectation for a big win indicated by the color type be common between the display color of the timer and other effects.
Here, the other effects include, for example, a plurality of dialogue display colors may be provided in the dialog preview effect, and the effect color and the emission color of the frame lighting device 34b may be changed each time a step progresses in the step-up preview effect. It may be something that changes, and various productions can be imagined.

A fifth feature of the update pattern determination table shown in FIG. 58 is that the degree of expectation for a big win differs depending on the display position of the timer (the degree of expectation for a big win is higher the closer to the center of the screen). By doing so, the player becomes interested in the display position of the timer, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, since the display size of the timer differs depending on the display position of the timer, it can be said that the degree of expectation for a big win differs depending on the display size of the timer (the larger the size, the higher the degree of expectation for a big win).

A sixth feature of the update pattern determination table shown in FIG. 58 is that timer subtraction starts after the standby display is performed rather than when the standby display indicating that the execution of the timer effect is waiting is not performed. When it is done, the expectation of the jackpot is higher. By doing so, the expectation of the player can be heightened even before the timer is counted down, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

The seventh feature of the update pattern determination table shown in FIG. 58 is that when the timer time (total) is the same, the expected degree of jackpot is higher when the timer is updated with the special pattern than with the normal pattern. There is a point that it will be higher. By doing so, it is possible to heighten the player's sense of expectation as to whether or not the pattern is a special pattern, thereby making it possible to enhance the amusement of the game.

The eighth feature of the update pattern determination table shown in FIG. 58 is that the rewind time in the special pattern tends to be longer in the case of a big win than in the case of a loss in the big win lottery result (depending on the timer time after rewinding). There is a difference in the degree of expectation for the jackpot). By doing so, it is possible to heighten the player's sense of expectation for the rewinding time, and to improve the amusement of the game.

The ninth feature of the update pattern determination table shown in FIG. 58 is that the initial timer time and the timer time after rewinding in the special pattern are different (the timer time after rewinding is shorter than the initial timer time). is mentioned. By doing so, it is possible to effectively arouse the player's sense of anticipation until the rewinding is completed, making it possible to enhance the interest in the game.

As described above, in the present embodiment, an event suggested by a timer effect and an event not suggested (jackpot announcement effect) are set. By doing so, it is possible to increase the variation of the variable presentation, prevent the player from getting bored, and improve the interest of the game.

In addition, it can be said that the number of events suggested by the timer production and the number of events not suggested (jackpot announcement production) are different. Specifically, the number of events suggested by the timer effect is greater than the events not suggested (jackpot announcement effect). It should be noted that the number of events that are not suggested by the timer effect may be larger than the number of events that are suggested.

In this embodiment, when the timer effect is executed, it always counts up to "0 seconds". good too. In the case of ending in the middle like this, it is sufficient not to suggest any predetermined event (so-called fake effect).

(Timer production and execution time)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 59 to 61, the timer effect for each variable effect pattern in which the timer effect may be executed and the execution timing of the timer effect will be described.
In FIGS. 59 to 61, the "effective period 1" is described as "effective period", and the timer effect suggesting the generation of "decisive effect 1" is described as "effective period generation timer effect".

Timer effect includes "icon change timer effect" that suggests icon change as a variable timer effect, and "pseudo continuous timer effect" that suggests the occurrence of pseudo-continuous as event timer effect, suggesting the start of zone effect. ``Zone occurrence timer effect'' to suggest the start of the heat zone effect ``Heat zone occurrence timer effect'' Suggesting the start of the next notice effect ``Next notice occurrence timer effect'' Suggesting the start of the normal reach effect ``Normal reach occurrence "Timer production", "SP reach generation timer production" suggesting the start of the SP reach production, "SPSP reach generation timer production" suggesting the start of the SPSP reach production, generation of the operation effective period of the production button 35 (decision production 1 There is a "valid period occurrence timer effect" that suggests occurrence), and a "jackpot pattern stop timer effect" that suggests the stop of the jackpot effect pattern.

The variable performance pattern in which the pseudo continuous notice performance is executed includes a "pseudo 1 fluctuation period" which is the first fluctuation period before the pseudo continuous notice is executed, and a "pseudo 1 fluctuation period", which is the first fluctuation period before the pseudo continuous notice is executed. "Pseudo 2 fluctuation period" which is the second fluctuation period, "Pseudo 3 fluctuation period" which is the third fluctuation period accompanying the execution of the pseudo continuous notice twice, and the fact that the pseudo continuous notice is executed three times There are at least four periods of "pseudo-four fluctuation periods," which are the fourth fluctuation periods involved.

As shown in FIG. 59(a), in the case of variable effect pattern 10 or 33 (button non-collision), three effects of icon change timer effect, pseudo-continuous timer effect, and SP ready-to-win timer effect are executed. there is a possibility. However, up to two timer effects are executed at the same time (in parallel).

In this case, the icon change timer effect is started between T1 and T4 and ends by T4. Also, the pseudo continuous timer effect is started between T1 and T2 and ends at T2. Also, the SP reach generation timer effect is started between T2 and T4 and ends at T4.

Further, the display of the effect pattern 38 is displayed during T0 to T7, and the display of the small effect pattern 48 is displayed during T0 to T7.
Incidentally, the effect symbol 38 is displayed in the ready-to-win state from T3, but the small effect symbol 48 is displayed without being in the ready-to-win state after T3.

As shown in FIG. 59(b), in the case of variable production pattern 11 or 34 (button non-collision), three of icon change timer production, zone generation timer production, and SP reach generation timer production can be executed. have a nature. However, up to two timer effects are executed at the same time (in parallel).

In this case, the icon change timer effect is started between T1 and T4 and ends by T4. Also, the zone occurrence timer effect is started between T1 and T2 and ends at T2. Also, the SP reach generation timer effect is started from the standby display or without the standby display between T2 and T4 and ends at T4.

Further, the display of the effect pattern 38 is displayed during T0 to T7, and the display of the small effect pattern 48 is displayed during T0 to T7.
Incidentally, the effect symbol 38 is displayed in the ready-to-win state from T3, but the small effect symbol 48 is displayed without being in the ready-to-win state after T3.

As shown in FIG. 59(c), in the case of variable effect pattern 12 or 35 (button non-collision), there is a possibility that two of the icon change timer effect and valid period occurrence timer effect are executed.

In this case, the icon change timer effect is started between T1 and T4 and ends by T4. Also, the valid period generation timer effect is started from the standby display during T3 to T5 or without the standby display and ends by the timing of T5.

Further, the display of the effect pattern 38 is displayed during T0-T2 and T3-T7, and the display of the small effect pattern 48 is displayed during T0-T7.
Incidentally, the effect symbol 38 is displayed in the ready-to-win state from T3, but the small effect symbol 48 is displayed without being in the ready-to-win state after T3.

As shown in FIG. 59(d), in the case of variable effect pattern 13 or 36 (button non-collision), three effects of icon change timer effect, zone generation timer effect, valid period generation timer effect can be executed. have a nature. However, up to two timer effects are executed at the same time (in parallel).

In this case, the icon change timer effect is started between T1 and T5 and ends by T5. Also, the zone occurrence timer effect is started between T1 and T3 and ends at T3. Also, the valid period occurrence timer effect is started between T4 and T6 and starts from the standby display, or starts without going through the standby display and ends at T6.

Further, the display of the effect pattern 38 is displayed during T0 to T7, and the display of the small effect pattern 48 is displayed during T0 to T7.
Note that the effect pattern 38 is displayed in the ready-to-win state from T4, but the small effect pattern 48 is displayed without being in the ready-to-win state even after T4.

As shown in FIG. 59(e), in the case of variable effect pattern 14 or 37 (button non-collision), there is a possibility that two of the icon change timer effect and valid period occurrence timer effect will be executed.

In this case, the icon change timer effect is started between T1 and T5 and ends by T5. Also, the valid period generation timer effect is started between T4 and T6 and ends at T6.

Further, the display of the effect pattern 38 is displayed during T0 to T3 and T4 to T8, and the display of the small effect pattern 48 is displayed during T0 to T8.
Note that the effect pattern 38 is displayed in the ready-to-win state from T4, but the small effect pattern 48 is displayed without being in the ready-to-win state even after T4.

As shown in FIG. 60(a), in the case of variable production pattern 16 or 39 (button non-collision), icon change timer production, normal reach generation timer production, SPSP reach generation timer production, effective period generation timer production. There are four possible runs. However, up to two timer effects are executed at the same time (in parallel).

In this case, the icon change timer effect is started between T1 and T4 and ends by T4. Also, the normal reach generation timer effect is started from the standby display during T1 to T3 or without the standby display, and ends at T3. Also, the SPSP ready-to-win timer effect is started between T3 and T4 and ends at T4. Also, the effective period occurrence timer effect is started from the standby display or without the standby display between T3 and T5, and ends at T5.

Further, the display of the effect pattern 38 is displayed during T0-T4 and T6-T7, and the display of the small effect pattern 48 is displayed during T0-T7.
The effect pattern 38 is displayed in the ready-to-win state during T3-T4, but the small effect pattern 48 is displayed without being in the ready-to-win state during T3-T4, and the effect pattern 38 is not displayed T4-T6. It is displayed in the reach state during

As shown in FIG. 60(b), in the case of variable effect pattern 17 or 40 (button non-collision), three effects of icon change timer effect, SPSP reach generation timer effect, valid period generation timer effect are executed. there is a possibility. However, up to two timer effects are executed at the same time (in parallel).

In this case, the icon change timer effect is started between T1 and T4 and ends by T4. Also, the SPSP ready-to-win timer effect is started between T3 and T4 and ends at T4. Also, the effective period occurrence timer effect is started from the standby display or without the standby display between T3 and T5, and ends at T5.

Further, the display of the effect pattern 38 is displayed during T0-T2, T3-T4, and T6-T7, and the display of the small effect pattern 48 is displayed during T0-T7.
The effect pattern 38 is displayed in the ready-to-win state during T3-T4, but the small effect pattern 48 is displayed without being in the ready-to-win state during T3-T4, and the effect pattern 38 is not displayed T4-T6. It is displayed in the reach state during

As shown in FIG. 60(c), in the case of variable production pattern 18 or 41 (button non-collision), icon change timer production, zone generation timer production, SPSP reach generation timer production, effective period generation timer production. There are four possible runs. However, up to two timer effects are executed at the same time (in parallel).

In this case, the icon change timer effect is started between T1 and T4 and ends by T4. Also, the zone occurrence timer effect is started between T1 and T2 and ends at T2. Also, the SPSP ready-to-win timer effect is started from the standby display or without the standby display between T2 and T4 and ends at T4. Also, the effective period occurrence timer effect is started from the standby display or without the standby display between T3 and T5, and ends at T5.

Further, the display of the effect pattern 38 is displayed during T0-T4 and T6-T7, and the display of the small effect pattern 48 is displayed during T0-T7.
The effect pattern 38 is displayed in the ready-to-win state during T3-T4, but the small effect pattern 48 is displayed without being in the ready-to-win state during T3-T4, and the effect pattern 38 is not displayed T4-T6. It is displayed in the reach state during

As shown in FIG. 60(d), in the case of variable effect pattern 19 or 42 (button hit), three effects of icon change timer effect, SPSP reach generation timer effect, valid period generation timer effect can be executed. have a nature. However, up to two timer effects are executed at the same time (in parallel).

In this case, the icon change timer effect is started between T1 and T4 and ends by T4. Also, the SPSP ready-to-win timer effect is started between T3 and T4 and ends at T4. Also, the effective period occurrence timer effect is started from the standby display or without the standby display between T3 and T5, and ends at T5.

Further, the display of the effect pattern 38 is displayed during T0-T2, T3-T4, and T6-T7, and the display of the small effect pattern 48 is displayed during T0-T7.
The effect pattern 38 is displayed in the ready-to-win state during T3-T4, but the small effect pattern 48 is displayed without being in the ready-to-win state during T3-T4, and the effect pattern 38 is not displayed T4-T6. It is displayed in the reach state during

As shown in FIG. 61(a), in the case of variable production pattern 20 or 43 (button non-collision), icon change timer production, pseudo-continuous timer production, zone generation timer production, SPSP reach generation timer production, There is a possibility that five valid period occurrence timer effects will be executed. However, up to two timer effects are executed at the same time (in parallel).

In this case, the icon change timer effect is started between T1 and T5 and ends by T5. Also, the pseudo continuous timer effect is started between T1 and T2 and ends at T2. The zone generation timer effect is started from the standby display or without the standby display between T1 and T3 and ends at T3. Also, the SPSP ready-to-win timer effect is started from the standby display or without the standby display between T3 and T5 and ends at T5. The effective period generation timer effect is started from the standby display or without the standby display between T4 and T6 and ends at T6.

Further, the display of the effect pattern 38 is displayed during T0 to T5 and T7 to T8, and the display of the small effect pattern 48 is displayed during T0 to T8.
The effect pattern 38 is displayed in the ready-to-win state during T4-T5, but the small effect pattern 48 is displayed without being in the ready-to-win state during T4-T5, and the effect pattern 38 is not displayed T5-T7. It is displayed in the reach state during

As shown in FIG. 61(b), in the case of variable production pattern 21 or 44 (button non-collision), icon change timer production, pseudo-continuous timer production, zone generation timer production, SPSP reach generation timer production, There is a possibility that five valid period occurrence timer effects will be executed. However, up to two timer effects are executed at the same time (in parallel).

In this case, the icon change timer effect is started between T1 and T5 and ends by T5. Also, the pseudo continuous timer effect is started between T1 and T2 and ends at T2. Also, the zone occurrence timer effect is started between T1 and T3 and ends at T3. Also, the SPSP ready-to-win timer effect is started from the standby display or without the standby display between T3 and T6 and ends at T6. Also, the effective period generation timer effect is started from the standby display or without the standby display between T4 and T7, and ends at T7.

Further, the display of the effect pattern 38 is displayed during T0 to T5 and T8 to T9, and the display of the small effect pattern 48 is displayed during T0 to T9.
The effect pattern 38 is displayed in the ready-to-win state during T4 to T5, but the small effect pattern 48 is displayed without being in the ready-to-win state during T4 to T5, and the effect pattern 38 is not displayed from T5 to T8. It is displayed in the reach state during

As shown in FIG. 61(c), in the case of variable effect pattern 22 or 45 (button hit), icon change timer effect, heat zone generation timer effect, next notice timer effect, SPSP reach timer effect, There is a possibility that five valid period occurrence timer effects will be executed. However, up to two timer effects are executed at the same time (in parallel).

In this case, the icon change timer effect is started between T1 and T5 and ends by T5. Also, the heat zone generation timer effect is started from the standby display or without the standby display between T1 and T3, and ends at T3. The next notice occurrence timer effect is started from the standby display or without the standby display between T2 and T5, and ends at T5. The SPSP reach generation timer effect is started from the standby display or without the standby display between T3 and T6 and ends at T6. The effective period occurrence timer effect is started from the standby display or without the standby display between T4 and T7, and ends at T7.

Further, the display of the effect pattern 38 is displayed during T0 to T5 and T8 to T9, and the display of the small effect pattern 48 is displayed during T0 to T9.
The effect pattern 38 is displayed in the ready-to-win state during T4 to T5, but the small effect pattern 48 is displayed without being in the ready-to-win state during T4 to T5, and the effect pattern 38 is not displayed from T5 to T8. It is displayed in the reach state during

As shown in FIG. 61(d), the variation effect pattern 46 (non-button impact) includes icon change timer effect, heat zone generation timer effect, next notice timer effect, SPSP ready-to-win timer effect, and jackpot pattern stop timer effect. Five may be performed. However, up to three timer effects are executed at the same time (in parallel).

In this case, the icon change timer effect is started between T1 and T6 and ends by T6. The heat zone generation timer effect is started between T1 and T3, or without waiting display, and ends at T3. The next notice occurrence timer effect is started from the standby display or without the standby display between T2 and T6, and ends at T6. The SPSP ready-to-win timer effect is started between T3 and T7, or without waiting display, and ends at T7. The jackpot pattern stop timer effect is started during T5 to T8, or without waiting display, and ends at T8.

Further, the display of the effect pattern 38 is displayed during T0-T6 and T8-T9, and the display of the small effect pattern 48 is displayed during T0-T9.
The effect pattern 38 is displayed in the ready-to-win state during T5 to T6, but the small effect pattern 48 is displayed without being in the ready-to-win state during T5 to T6, and the effect pattern 38 is not displayed from T6 to T8. It is displayed in the reach state during

Thus, even if there are many timer effects with overlapping execution times, the number of timer effects to be executed at the same time (in parallel) is limited (up to three). By doing so, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the player's line of sight is too disturbed and the player cannot concentrate on the game, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the limit number of timer effects that are executed at the same time for each variable effect pattern is different (The variable effect pattern with a high expectation of a big hit is a timer that is executed at the same time than the variable effect pattern with a low expectation of a big hit. The number of productions is large). By doing so, it becomes possible for the player to estimate the degree of expectation for a big win based on the number of timer effects executed at the same time, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, the timer effect is not executed in the operation promotion effect and the winning/losing notification effect which are executed in the final stage (final stage) of the variable effect. By doing so, the hit-or-lose notification effect, which is one of the effects that the player is most interested in, is not disturbed, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, during the execution of an effect with a high degree of attention from the player (for example, next notice effect, SPSP ready-to-win effect, all-rotation ready-to-win, etc.), the effect pattern 38 is erased, and the small effect pattern 48 continues. It is now displayed. By doing so, it is possible to more effectively draw the player's attention to the production with a high degree of attention (without hindering the production with a high degree of attention from the player), and the first special symbol (second The player can grasp the execution state of the variable display of the special symbol).

Also, the execution period of the icon change timer effect is until the end of the normal ready-to-win effect period, but it may be the period until establishment of ready-to-win, the end of SP to reach, or the end of SP to reach.

(Example of timer effect)
Next, with reference to FIG. 62 and FIG. 63, an effect example in which three timer effects are executed during the variable effect will be described. Here, in the normal game state, execution of the variable effect pattern 45, the icon change timer effect (normal timer 1), the heat zone generation timer effect (normal pattern 11), and the SPSP ready-to-win timer effect (normal pattern 13) is determined. shall be

First, as shown in FIG. 62(a), when the fluctuation time of the first special symbol ends in a state where the number of reserved first special symbols is "2", the effect symbol 38 "234" is displayed on the image display device 31. is displayed in a stopped state, and the variable effect ends. Also, the small effect symbol 48 is stopped and displayed at "234".

Then, as shown in FIG. 62(b), when the variable display of the first special symbol is started, one of the first reserved icons changes to the variable icon TI, and the variable display of the effect symbol 38 is started. Variation production is executed. After that, when the icon change timer effect is started, a white character timer HTW of "5 seconds left", which is a normal display, is displayed in the vicinity of the variable icon display area 31c, and subtraction of the timer time is started. In addition, the variable display of the small effect pattern 48 is also started.
Note that, like the white-letter timer HTW, the one that displays the timer time in the timer effect is sometimes called a "timer icon".
From the "timer icon", it is possible to grasp how the timer time is being subtracted, and to recognize how long it will be until "0 seconds remain".

Next, after the white character timer HTW of the icon change timer effect reaches "0 seconds left" (see FIG. 62(c)), when the characters "GO!!" The icon changes to a blue icon, and the variation icon change effect is performed (see FIG. 62(d)). When the heat zone generation timer effect is started at this timing, the image display device 31 displays a white character timer ZTW of "15 seconds left" as normal display, and timer time subtraction is started. It should be noted that although the description is simplified in FIG. 62(d), strictly speaking, after the display of "GO!!" is performed, the change icon changes from the white icon to the blue icon, An icon change effect is performed.
That is, from the "timer icon", it can be said that it is possible to recognize the execution time of the effect to be performed after "0 seconds left".

Then, as shown in FIG. 62(e), when the left and right performance symbols are the separated eyes and the pseudo consecutive symbols suggesting the occurrence of the pseudo continuous advance notice are temporarily stopped as the middle performance symbols, the pseudo 1 variation occurs. period ends. At this time, the white character timer ZTW becomes "12 seconds remaining", which is the timer time during subtraction.

After that, as shown in FIG. 62(f), when the effect symbols start to change again due to the occurrence of the pseudo-continuation, the zone effect is started and the zone telop is displayed. At this time, the white character timer ZTW becomes "10 seconds remaining", which is the timer time during subtraction.

Next, as shown in FIG. 62(g), in a state in which the left and right performance symbols are the separated eyes and the pseudo consecutive symbols suggesting the occurrence of the pseudo continuous advance notice are temporarily stopped as the middle performance symbols, the pseudo 2 The variable period ends. At this time, the white-character timer ZTW becomes "one second left", which is the timer time during subtraction.

Then, the effect pattern starts to change again due to the occurrence of the pseudo-run, and after the white character timer ZTW reaches "0 seconds remaining" (see FIG. 62(h)), the characters "GO!!" are displayed. Then, the heat zone effect is started and the heat zone telop is displayed (see FIG. 63(a)). When the SPSP ready-to-win timer effect is started at this timing, the image display device 31 displays a blue character timer STB of "XX seconds left", which is a standby display, immediately above the white character timer ZTW. It should be noted that FIG. 63(a) is described in a simplified manner, but strictly speaking, after the display of "GO!!" It has become.

The blue character timer STB is displayed immediately above the first pending icon display area 31a when another timer (here, white character timer ZTW) is not displayed, but the other timer is displayed. When it is on, it is displayed just above the other timers, and when the other timers are deleted, it moves to just above the first pending icon display area 31a.

After that, as shown in FIG. 63(b), the normal ready-to-win effect is started when the same "3" as the left and right effect symbols is temporarily stopped to form a ready-to-win state. At this time, the variable icon changes from the blue icon to the green icon, and the variable icon change effect is performed, and the blue character timer STB changes to the normal display of "more 20 seconds" and timer time subtraction starts. be. At this time, the small effect pattern 48 is displayed without being in the ready-to-win state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63(c), when the next notice effect is started, the image display device 31 displays the characters "next notice SPSP reach!" Then, the effect pattern 38 forming the ready-to-win state is erased, the small effect pattern 48 is to be in the ready-to-win state, and the first pending icon displayed in the first pending icon display area 31a is erased. At this time, the blue-character timer STB indicates "10 seconds remaining", which is the timer time being subtracted.

Then, after the blue character timer STB reaches "0 seconds remaining" (see FIG. 63(d)), the characters "GO!!" reference). At this time, the effect pattern 38 remains erased, and the small effect pattern 48 is displayed in the ready-to-win state. It should be noted that although the illustration is simplified in FIG. 63(e), strictly speaking, the SPSP ready-to-win effect is started after the display of "GO!!".

Next, with reference to FIG. 64 and FIG. 65, an effect example when two timer effects are executed during the variable effect will be described. Here, it is assumed that execution of the variable effect pattern 45, the next notice generation timer effect (normal pattern 21), and the effective period generation timer effect (special pattern 2) is determined in the normal game state.

First, as shown in FIG. 64(a), when the zone telop is displayed and the zone effect is being executed, the left and right effect symbols are temporarily stopped, and the middle effect symbol is a pseudo continuous notice. When the pseudo consecutive symbols suggesting the occurrence of are temporarily stopped, the pseudo 2 fluctuation period ends.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64(b), the performance symbols start to fluctuate again due to the occurrence of the pseudo-run. At this time, when the effective period occurrence timer effect is started, the image display device 31 displays a white character timer YTW of "35 seconds left" as normal display, and the subtraction of the timer time is started.

Then, as shown in FIG. 64(c), when the same "3" as the left and right performance symbols is temporarily stopped to form a ready-to-win state, the normal ready-to-win performance is started. At this time, the white-character timer YTW becomes "10 seconds remaining", which is the timer time during subtraction. Furthermore, the valid period occurrence timer effect is started, and the image display device 31 displays a red character timer UTR of "XX seconds left", which is a standby display, at the top of the screen. At this time, the small effect pattern 48 is displayed without being in the ready-to-win state.

After that, after the white character timer YTW reaches "0 seconds remaining" (see FIG. 64(d)), when the characters "GO!!" , the characters "Next time notice SPSP reach!" are displayed (see FIG. 64(e)). Then, the effect pattern 38 forming the ready-to-win state is erased, the small effect pattern 48 is to be in the ready-to-win state, and the first pending icon displayed in the first pending icon display area 31a is erased. At this time, the red-letter timer UTR shows the normal display of "35 seconds remaining", and the timer time starts to be decremented. It should be noted that although the illustration is simplified in FIG. 64(e), strictly speaking, after the display of "GO!!" SPSP Reach!” is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64(f), when the SPSP ready-to-win effect is started, the red character timer UTR becomes "25 seconds remaining" which is the timer time being subtracted. At this time, the effect pattern 38 remains erased, and the small effect pattern 48 is displayed in the ready-to-win state.

Then, as shown in FIG. 64(g), when the red character timer UTR reaches "0 seconds remaining", the timer starts rewinding and the number of seconds of the timer increases.

After that, as shown in FIG. 64(h), when the rewinding of the timer is completed, the red-letter timer UTR changes to the normal display of "15 seconds remaining", and decrementing of the timer time is resumed.

Next, after the red character timer UTR reaches "0 seconds remaining" (see FIG. 65(a)), when the characters "GO!!" The image display device 31 displays a gauge image indicating the operation effective period of the production button 35 and an operation prompting image SG prompting the operation of the production button 35 (the production button in a special state). 35) is displayed (see FIG. 65(b)). It should be noted that FIG. 65B simplifies the description, but strictly speaking, after the display of "GO!!" When the valid period occurs, the image display device 31 displays a gauge image indicating the operation valid period of the effect button 35 and an operation prompting image SG prompting the operation of the effect button 35 (an image simulating the effect button 35 in a special state). ) is displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 65(c), when the effect button 35 is operated or the effective operation period elapses, the first decorative member 33a moves from the standby position to the center of the screen, which is the effect position, and the image display device 31 , a light emitting effect EF centered on the first decorative member 33a is displayed (hit-or-lose notification effect).

In this way, when the effective period of operation of the effect button 35 becomes "0", the win/lose notification effect is started even if the effect button 35 is not operated, so the effect can also be said to be a kind of timer effect.

After that, as shown in FIG. 65(d), the first decorative member 33a returns from the production position to the standby position, the production pattern 38 "333" is stopped, and the variable production ends. Also, the small effect pattern 48 is stopped and displayed at "333".

In this way, the timer in the icon changing timer effect is displayed in the vicinity of the variable icon display area 31c, so that the player watching the icon changing timer effect visually recognizes the variable icon changing effect without moving his line of sight. Therefore, it becomes difficult to overlook the variable icon change effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the timer presentation, after the numerical value of the timer reaches "0 seconds remaining", an abstract display of "GO!!" is performed. That is, it suggests that the value of the timer becomes "0 seconds left" and the effect to be executed after that (post-update effect) is started. I tried not to suggest the content. As a result, it becomes difficult to miss the start of the effect (post-update effect) to be executed thereafter, and it is possible to draw attention to what kind of effect (post-update effect) is to be executed.

In addition, in the timer effect, after the timer value reaches "0 seconds left", the display is not limited to "GO!!" A special effect may be displayed (for example, an effect such that "0 seconds left" is burning). By doing so, it becomes difficult to miss an event that is executed after the numerical value of the timer reaches "0 seconds left", and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

On the other hand, after the numerical value of the timer reaches "0 seconds left", a character indicating an event to be executed after that (for example, in the example of FIG. (It may be possible to specifically display the effect after the update). As a result, it becomes easy to understand what kind of event the predetermined event indicated by the timer effect is, so that it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, a pattern in which characters indicating an event are displayed after the timer numerical value reaches "0 seconds left" as in the present embodiment, and a pattern in which the timer numerical value is displayed after the timer numerical value reaches "0 seconds left" is displayed. It is also possible to mix a pattern of displaying a message that "0 seconds remain", and to display one of the patterns depending on the type of event. In this case, for example, when the event suggested by the timer effect is the fixed effect, the timer value becomes "0 seconds left" after the timer value becomes "0 seconds left". It is better to use a pattern that displays a notification. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from knowing that the big win is confirmed before performing the confirmation effect, and the confirmation effect can be effectively executed.

In addition, when multiple timer effects are executed at the same time, the timers are displayed so that they do not overlap each other, so it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of making it difficult to see the number of seconds of the timers, which enhances the enjoyment of the game. can be improved.

In addition, the countdown display (subtraction display) in the timer effect is updated at approximately the same intervals as the actual time measurement, so when the timer effect starts, it is possible to predict when any event will occur. The game can be effectively livened up until the timing when a predetermined event occurs (the timer reaches 0 seconds), and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, since the timer is displayed so as to be superimposed in front of the other effect images (excluding the small effect pattern 48), it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the number of seconds of the timer is difficult to see, thereby enhancing the interest of the game. can be improved. It should be noted that a specific effect image (for example, an image of an advance notice effect with a high degree of expectation for a big win, etc.) may be displayed so as to be superimposed in front of the timer.

In addition, although the timer display may overlap in front of the production pattern 38, it is not overlapped in front of the small production pattern 48, so even if the timer display overlaps in front of the production pattern 38. Also, the player can grasp the execution state of the variable display of the first special symbol (second special symbol).

In this embodiment, it is possible to execute the big win notice effect during execution of the timer effect, but the execution of the big win notice effect may be restricted during the execution of the timer effect. Specifically, the jackpot preview effect may not be executed completely, or a specific jackpot preview effect (at least one of dialogue preview effect, step-up preview effect, character group preview effect) is not performed, but it is Notice effects other than this (words notice effect, step-up notice effect, remainder of character group notice effect) may be executed. Also, during the execution of the timer effect, it is possible to limit the execution of the fixed effect for definitely notifying that the jackpot will be won.

Further, in the present embodiment, the timer effect does not suggest the execution of the big win notice effect, but the execution of the big win notice effect may be suggested. In addition, in the case of executing a fixed effect for definitively informing that a big win will occur, the execution of the fixed effect may be suggested by a timer effect.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when a plurality of timer effects are executed at the same time (in parallel), it is possible for a plurality of timers to be displayed in standby mode. It is also possible that the number of timers that are executed is always one.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the special pattern in the timer effect, when the timer reaches 0 seconds, the number of seconds is rewound. Alternatively, the decrementing of seconds may be suspended until the timer reaches 0 seconds, and the decrementing may be restarted after a predetermined period of time.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the timer type of the timer effect is short timer or middle timer, no special pattern is determined as the update pattern, and when it is long timer, the special pattern is determined as the update pattern. Although it is decided, a special pattern may be decided as an update pattern even in the case of a middle timer.

Further, in the present embodiment, the timer is displayed on the image display device 31 and the timer effect is executed. Alternatively, the display device that displays the timer may be changed depending on the suggested event and/or the timer type. For example, when the variable icon or pending icon is displayed on the second display device, a timer suggesting icon change is displayed on the second display device, and a timer suggesting other events is displayed on the image display device 31. and so on.

Also, in this embodiment, when two timer effects are executed, the two timer effects do not suggest the same event, but the two timer effects may suggest the same event. may Specifically, when a variable performance pattern with a low degree of expectation for a big win is determined, two timer performances are prevented from suggesting the same event, and when a variable performance pattern with a high degree of expectation for a big win is determined. For example, two timer effects suggest the same event at a predetermined rate.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display mode of the timer does not change in the middle, but it may be changed in the middle. Specifically, the display mode is changed after the timer is rewound, or the display mode is changed after the timer is restarted after being added or paused.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the timer effect is used to suggest an event that occurs during the variable effect. can be

Further, in the present embodiment, the timer effect can be executed during the zone effect period, but the timer effect may be made impossible or difficult to execute during the zone effect period.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the timer effect is executed, the timer display does not disappear until the timer effect is finished, but the timer may disappear temporarily. In this case, the numerical value may be updated while the timer is turned off, or the update of the numerical value may be suspended while the timer is turned off.

Also, in the present embodiment, there are a plurality of timer display sizes in the timer effect, but only the same size may be displayed.

Also, in the present embodiment, the timer effects can be executed at the same time, but when they are executed at the same time, it is better not to start them at the same time, and it is better not to end them at the same time. By doing so, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the player's line of sight is too disturbed and the player cannot concentrate on the game, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the effective period of operation of the effect button 35 is limited to those that occur before execution of the winning/losing notification effect and those that occur before the dialogue display of the dialogue notice effect, but it also occurs in other effects. You can make it For example, it may occur before establishment of the ready-to-win state, and depending on the operation of the production button 35, whether or not to become the ready-to-win state may be encouraged.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the timing for erasing the effect pattern 38 is the execution period of the next notice effect, the SPSP ready-to-win effect, and the all-rotation ready-to-win effect. You may make it erase.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the performance pattern 38 is erased after being in the ready-to-win state, the small performance pattern 48 is set to be in the ready-to-win state. Even if 38 is not erased, the small performance pattern 48 may be in the ready-to-win state, and even if the performance pattern 38 is erased after being in the ready-to-win state, the small performance pattern 48 may not be in the ready-to-win state. good.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the stop display of the performance pattern 38 and the small performance pattern 48 is the same combination in both the case of a big win and the loss, but in the case of a big win, the stop display is made in the same combination and the loss is made. In the case of , different combinations may be used. For example, in the case of losing, there is only one combination of the stop display of the small effect pattern 48.例文帳に追加

(Diagram explaining icons in the first stock effect)
Next, an example of icons in the first stock effect will be described with reference to FIG.
Note that "at the time of icon acquisition" indicates the display mode of the icon displayed on the image display device 31 when the icon is acquired.
Further, "at the time of icon release" indicates the display mode of the icon displayed on the image display device 31 when the icon is released.
Further, the “effect corresponding to release” indicates a effect that is executed by releasing the icon (without causing a large time lag from releasing the icon).
Further, the "post-release corresponding effect" indicates an effect that is executed after the "release corresponding effect" is performed (with some time lag from the release of the icon).
Here, the "release corresponding effect" and the "post-release corresponding effect" constitute a predetermined effect corresponding to the game privilege.

First, FIG. 66(a) shows an example of a normal icon. As an example of the normal icon, three types of "gimmick actuation", "button push", and "color up" are shown.
"Gimmick actuation" indicates that an actuation effect is generated in which the first decorative member 33a (effect accessory) is activated. Then, it can be recognized in advance that the first decorative member 33a (effect accessory) will be activated.
It should be noted that "gimmick actuation" corresponds only to "occurrence of the actuation effect of the first decorative member 33a" as an effect corresponding to release, and other effects corresponding to release and effects corresponding to release are not defined. In other words, for an icon such as "gimmick activation", the content of the effect written on the icon and the content of the effect to be executed are completely the same, so as shown in "remarks", "single target" (execution target) The production is single).

It should be noted that the "single object" icon is just an example of the "gimmick activation" icon. There may be. For example, an icon, such as "SP reach title red", may be provided so that the user can recognize in advance that the SP reach title will be displayed in red.

Next, "button push" indicates that an operation prompting effect prompting the player to press the effect button 35 (once) occurs, and an icon marked "button push" is obtained. The player can recognize in advance that the effect of pressing the effect button 35 will occur when the icon is released.
It should be noted that "button push" corresponds to "generate effect of pressing effect button 35" as an effect corresponding to release. In other words, an icon such as "button push" corresponds only to the effect corresponding to release when pressed, and does not have other effects corresponding to release. It can be said that "one object".
On the other hand, "Cut-in effect occurs" and "Decisive effect 1 occur" correspond as corresponding effects after release. Whether "Cut-in effect occurs" or "Decisive effect 1 occurs" is executed It is difficult for the player to recognize in advance when the icon is acquired. That is, for an icon such as "button push", since the content of the effect written on the icon and the content of the effect to be executed do not completely match in the corresponding effect after release, as shown in the "remarks", "multiple It is defined as "target" (there are multiple effects to be executed).
Therefore, as shown in the "remarks", an icon such as "button push" is a single object (if only the effect corresponding to the release is seen), and multiple objects (if the effect corresponding to the release is included). It can be said.

It should be noted that the icon "button push" is given as an example only, and any icon can be used as long as the corresponding effect at the time of release can be recognized in advance, but the corresponding effect after release cannot be recognized in advance. good too. For example, it may be an icon indicating execution of the above-described timer effect.
In the case of the timer effect, as described above, there are multiple suggestive events after the timer effect reaches "0 seconds left", and which suggestive event occurs until the timer effect reaches "0 seconds left". There is a characteristic that it is not possible to grasp whether to do. Therefore, the suggestive event after the timer effect reaches "0 seconds left" can be regarded as the post-release corresponding effect.
For example, if an icon with "XX seconds remaining" is displayed so that the player can recognize in advance that the timer effect will be performed when the icon is acquired, the player can recognize that the timer effect will be performed when the icon is released. Therefore, the icon has the same positioning as the "button push" icon. Therefore, such an icon may be provided as an icon for "multiple objects".

Next, "color UP" means that the reach title color change occurs in SP reach and SP SP reach, and the change icon color change occurs, and the icon marked "color UP" is acquired. The player who has played can recognize in advance that the color change in some effect will be performed when the icon is released. On the other hand, since only "Color UP" is written, it is difficult to recognize in advance what kind of color change will be performed when the icon is acquired.
"Color UP" corresponds to "SP reach, SPSP reach title color change occurrence" and "corresponding variation icon color change occurrence" as corresponding effects at the time of release, and corresponding effects after release are not defined. In other words, for an icon such as "Color UP", although there is no corresponding effect after release, "SP reach, SPSP reach title color change occurs" and "corresponding icon color change occurs" are supported as corresponding effects at the time of release. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to recognize in advance whether "color change of SP reach, SP SP reach title" is executed or "color change of the corresponding variable icon" is executed. there is Therefore, for an icon such as "color up", the content of the effect written on the icon does not completely match the content of the effect to be executed in the release corresponding effect, and unlike the "button push", the release Since it has multiple effects corresponding to time, it is defined as "multiple objects" (multiple effects to be executed) as shown in "Remarks".

It should be noted that the icon "color up" is just an example, and any icon may be used as long as the effect corresponding to release cannot be recognized in advance. For example, there is an icon such as "chance up" that makes it possible to recognize that the chance up will be performed in some production, but it is difficult to recognize in advance in which production the chance up will be performed when the icon is acquired. may
Note that the chance UP is, for example, an effect such as displaying a specific character image that would normally not be displayed (without chance UP) in one scene during SP reach.
Also, the color-up effect is not limited to SP reach, SPSP reach titles, and the variable icons, but may be other effects. For example, when an effect is provided for changing the character's dialogue displayed in SP reach or SPSP reach from normal color (for example, white) to red, the effect may be subject to color enhancement.

In addition, the color UP icon may be configured in a color that changes depending on the effect corresponding to release. For example, if it is decided that the variable icon will be blue in the production corresponding to release, a blue color UP icon will be displayed, and if it is decided that the variable icon will be red in the production corresponding to release , a red color UP icon may be displayed. Also, a color UP icon of a color (for example, rainbow color) that confirms that a jackpot game will be awarded may be displayed. As a result, although it is difficult to recognize in advance what kind of color change will be performed when the icon is acquired, it is possible to recognize in advance what color the icon will be changed to, which makes it more interesting when the icon is acquired. be able to.
Also, for example, when the reach title is displayed in red and the variation icon is displayed in red, and the degree of expectation for the jackpot game is changed, the red color UP icon will eventually (Reach title or the variable icon), or a game with a higher expectation that a jackpot game is given. can be further improved.

It should be noted that the icons shown in FIG. 66(a) are described as suggesting effects such as "gimmick activation", "button push", and "color up", but they are particularly suggestive. The design makes it impossible to know when the content of the production will be executed (the timing of execution of the production cannot be grasped).

FIG. 66(b) shows an example of a special icon, and shows one type of "?" as an example of the special icon. When the icon is acquired, the special icon "?" is displayed as an icon such as "?" It has become.
After the icon is released, the explanation is omitted because it is the same as in FIG. 66(a), but the special icon "?" Yes, when the "button push" is released when the icon is released, it is "single target" (if only the effect corresponding to release is seen), and it is "multiple targets" (if the corresponding effect is included after release), If "Color UP" is released when the icon is released, it becomes "multiple targets".
In this way, by providing an icon that cannot be recognized even when the icon is released when the icon is acquired, it is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of what will come out when the icon is released.

It should be noted that, although not particularly illustrated, a plurality of types of display modes of special icons may be provided. For example, with a normal-colored special icon and a red special icon, in the variation production pattern when the jackpot lottery result is a big win, the red special icon is displayed compared to the variation production pattern in the case of a loss ( decision).
As a result, even though it is not possible to recognize the effect corresponding to the release when the icon is acquired, the degree of expectation for the big win can be recognized, so that the effect can be further improved.

Note that the icon shown in FIG. 66(b) does not indicate the content of the effect such as "?", and naturally has a design in which it is not possible to know when the content of the effect will be executed.

FIG. 66(c) shows another grouping of each icon. That is, "gimmick activation" is defined as "clear" at the time of icon acquisition because it is a "single target" as described above and the effect corresponding to release is clear.
On the other hand, the special icon ``?'' is defined as ``unclear'' when the icon is acquired, since even the effect corresponding to release cannot be recognized. Note that when any icon is released from the special icon "?", the characteristics of the released icon are followed. For example, if "gimmick actuation" is released, it becomes "clear", and if "button push" is released, it becomes "partially clear", which will be described later.
On the other hand, in the case of the "button push", as described above, looking only at the effect corresponding to release, it is a "single object" and the effect corresponding to release is clear. On the other hand, if we only look at the post-release corresponding effects, it is "multiple targets" and the post-release corresponding effects are unclear. From this relationship, it is defined as "partially clear" when acquiring an icon.
Also, in the case of "color up", as described above, it is "multiple objects", and although it is clear that some kind of color change will be performed, it is unclear what kind of color change will be performed. Therefore, it is defined as "partially clear" when the icon is acquired.

It should be noted that "partially clear" may be positioned as "clear" or "unclear" depending on the viewpoint.
In other words, if it is "button push", it can be said that it is "clear" from the point of view that at least the pressing of the effect button 35 can be recognized in the release corresponding effect, and the effect generated by pressing the effect button 35 ( In other words, it can be said that it is "unclear" from the point of view that the corresponding production after release) cannot be recognized.
Also, if it is "color UP", it can be said that it is "clear" from the viewpoint that at least it can be recognized that the color change will be performed in some kind of effect as a corresponding effect at the time of release, and what color change will be performed. It can be said that it is "unclear" from the point of view that it cannot be recognized.
Thus, what is "partially clear" can be "clear" or "unclear" depending on the point of view.

As described above, in FIG. 66, the icons in the first stock effect in the present embodiment have been described, but other icons can be changed as appropriate.
For example, the icons may include only normal icons shown in FIG. 66(a), and may not include special icons.
In addition, as shown in FIG. 66, only icons similar to "gimmick activation" may be provided, only icons similar to "button push" may be provided, or only icons similar to "color up" may be provided. It may be provided, or a combination of any two of these may be provided.
Also, when the icon is acquired, only the special icon shown in FIG. 66(b) may be displayed, and when the icon is released, it may be notified whether it is one of the icons shown in FIG. 66(a). .

(Production example of the first stock production)
Next, an example of the first stock effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 67 to 71. FIG. Here, it is assumed that the variable effect pattern 31 is determined in the normal game state. In addition, in the image display device 31, only those required for the explanation of the first stock effect are described, and some of them are omitted as appropriate (for example, the small effect symbol 48, etc.).

First, as shown in FIG. 67(a), the image display device 31 variably displays the effect pattern 38, and the normal variation in the variable effect pattern 31 is performed. Then, as shown in FIG. 67(b), an image saying "Press the button to get the icon!" is displayed on the image display device 31 during normal variation. That is, FIG. 67(b) is the entry screen of the first stock effect. In addition, FIG. 67(b) simply shows the entry screen of the first stock effect. Images may be displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 67(c), the effect button 35 becomes operable, and the image display device 31 displays the operation prompting image SG prompting the operation of the effect button 35 and the image "Press!" . Then, as shown in FIG. 67(d), it is notified that the icon acquisition image KG (in this case, "gimmick activation" icon) in the first stock effect has been acquired with the operation of the effect button 35 or the elapse of the operation effective period. image is displayed. In this way, one icon is acquired with one acquisition opportunity (for example, one operation of the effect button 35).

67(b) is displayed, and the operation prompting image SG prompting the operation of the effect button 35 shown in FIG. 67(c) is displayed. It is possible to provide a first stock effect failure route (so-called gimmick) that cannot be obtained.
Further, at the stage of displaying the rush screen of the first stock effect, whether or not the rush screen is displayed is determined, and if the rush screen is displayed, the first stock effect is executed, and if the rush screen is not displayed. The first stock effect may not be executed (so-called fake effect may be executed).
On the other hand, when the icon acquisition image KG in the first stock effect is displayed (when at least one icon is acquired) in FIG. You may do so.
As a result, the player's attention can be drawn to whether or not the icon can be obtained in the scene of FIG. 67(d).

Then, as shown in FIG. 67(e), the operation prompting image SG prompting the operation of the effect button 35 is displayed again to prompt acquisition of further icons. At this time, the image display device 31 (upper left) displays the already obtained icon image KG1 (here, the "gimmick activation" icon) in a smaller size than when the icon was obtained (FIG. 67(d)). there is

Then, as shown in FIG. 67(f), with the operation of the effect button 35 or the elapse of the operation effective period, it is notified that the icon acquisition image KG (here, the "color UP" icon) in the first stock effect has been acquired. image is displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 67(g), the operation prompting image SG prompting the operation of the effect button 35 is displayed again to prompt acquisition of further icons. At this time, in the display area (upper left) of the image display device 31, the already acquired icon images KG1 (here, "gimmick activation" icon) and KG2 (here, "color up" icon) are displayed at the time of icon acquisition ( It is displayed in a size smaller than that in FIGS. 67(d) and (f)). By repeating such an effect a plurality of times, an icon is acquired in the first stock effect.
Note that the examples shown in FIGS. 67(c), (d), (e), and (f) correspond to the "acquisition effect".

Then, as shown in FIG. 67(h), when the icon acquisition end condition in the first stock effect (when the number of acquired icons reaches the upper limit number (4) in the first stock effect) is established, an image is displayed. In the display area (upper side) of the device 31, four icon images KG1 to KG4 that have already been acquired are displayed, and an image "Complete!" is displayed to notify that the icon acquisition of the first stock effect has been completed. be done.

Note that the upper limit of the number of icons to be acquired is not limited to four, and may be changed as appropriate. There may be no upper limit in the first place. Also, the upper limit number may differ depending on the variation effect pattern. For example, the upper limit number may be larger for the variable effect pattern of the SP reach than the variable effect pattern of the SP reach.
Also, the number of icon acquisitions may be linked to the number of pseudo runs shown in FIG. For example, with variation pattern 4, one icon can be acquired, with variation pattern 7, two icons can be acquired, and with variation pattern 17, three icons can be acquired. With this configuration, it is possible to estimate the number of pseudo-runs from the number of icons acquired, so that it is possible to add interest.

It should be noted that the icon acquisition end condition in the first stock effect is not limited to the above. For example, it may be when the number of operations of the effect button 35 related to icon acquisition of the first stock effect reaches the upper limit (for example, four times), or when the normal fluctuation period ends.

Although not shown in FIG. 67, a plurality of icon acquisition images KG of the same type may be acquired. For example, there is a case where multiple "Color UP" can be obtained. In such a case, the display mode of the icon acquisition image KG (“color UP” icon) may be as follows.
For example, when two "color UP" icons are acquired, two icon acquisition images KG ("color UP" icons) are displayed.
For example, when two "color UP" icons are acquired, only one icon acquisition image KG ("color UP" icon) is displayed, and "x2" is displayed on the icon acquisition image KG ("color UP" icon). image is additionally displayed.
Any of these display modes may be used.
The former makes it possible to visually show that many icons have been acquired, and the latter makes it possible to prevent the display area from being occupied by the display of a plurality of icons.

In FIG. 67, the operation prompting image SG prompting the operation of the effect button 35 is displayed, and the icon is obtained as the effect button 35 is operated or the operation effective period elapses. Instead of displaying, the icon may be acquired without the operation of the effect button 35 or the expiration of the operation effective period. For example, an icon acquisition effect may be performed using a character image, and an icon may be given as a result of the effect.

Then, when the acquisition of the icon for the first stock effect is completed, normal reach is displayed on the image display device 31 as shown in FIG. 68(i). That is, in the icon acquisition example of FIG. 67, the icon is acquired by short-term concentration during the normal fluctuation period. As a result, expectations for the award of the big winning game can be increased at once.

Acquisition of the icon for the first stock effect is not limited to the example shown in FIG. may Also, in the normal fluctuation, normal reach, and SP reach, after the failure is notified and before the stop display of the production pattern 38, the entry screen of the first stock production shown in FIG. may be started.

Then, as shown in FIG. 68(j), an image (temporary stop at the production pattern 38 of "343") is displayed to notify that the normal reach is lost, and then, as shown in FIG. 68(k). , to suggest what icon to emit. In this suggestion, for example, the icon image is moved from the display position of the acquired icon image shown in FIG. display. At the same time, an image such as "release!" is displayed. Note that in FIG. 68(k), an icon release image HG (here, "gimmick activation" icon KG1) is displayed in release. By making such a suggestion, the player can easily grasp the icon to be released from now on.

In the stock effect, acquisition of icons (see FIG. 47) is performed based on the effect structure of the determined variable effect pattern, the determined big hit notice effect, and the determined icon change effect. Although not shown in particular flow charts and the like, release is realized, for example, as follows.
For example, the sub CPU 120a can recognize in advance the time (the number of display frames) during which the effect corresponding to release is executed based on the determined variable effect pattern.
For example, in the variable production pattern 8, the first decorative member 33a (director accessory) moves downward at the time when "20 seconds" have elapsed from the start of the fluctuation (β-th frame in terms of the number of display frames from the start of the variable production). (Falling) and recognizable.
Then, the sub CPU 120a sets the time (the number of display frames) immediately before the time when the effect corresponding to release is executed as the release timing of the icon.
For example, in the case of the variable effect pattern 8, the timing of releasing the icon is set at the time when "15 seconds" have elapsed from the start of the variable effect (the α-th frame in terms of the number of display frames from the start of the variable effect). As a result, the release effect of the "gimmick activation" icon can be executed immediately before the first decorative member 33a (effect accessory) moves (drops) downward.
That is, in the example of the variable effect pattern 8, when "15 seconds" have passed since the start of the variable effect (when it comes to the α-th frame in terms of the number of display frames from the start of the variable effect), "predetermined release condition Equivalent to "established".

It should be noted that new icons are not acquired after the icons are started to be released in FIG. 68(k). That is, the icon acquisition part is executed, and then the icon release part is executed, and these parts are not mixed. As a result, only acquisition is performed in the acquisition part, and only release is performed in the release part, so that an effect that is easy for the player to understand can be provided.

Then, as shown in FIG. 68(l), the first decorative member 33a (effect accessory) moves (falls) downward (that is, the "development effect" is executed), and when the released icon is released as described above, Execute corresponding performance. And it is informed that the variable production is still continued by the production. It should be noted that the time from the display of the icon to be released in FIG. 68(k) to the presentation corresponding to release in FIG. . Thereby, the player can recognize that the effect has been executed by releasing the icon, and that the released icon and the executed effect are linked.
In addition, after suggesting which icon to release in FIG. 68(k), the effect corresponding to release is executed in FIG. It can be a performance.

The time from when the icon to be released is displayed to when the effect corresponding to release is performed may differ for each icon and corresponding effect within a range in which a large time lag does not occur. For example, the time from releasing the "gimmick activation" icon to the start of downward movement (falling) of the first decorative member 33a (effect accessory), and the time from releasing the "button PUSH" icon to the effect button 35 , the latter may take longer. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the characteristic of the corresponding effect (for example, the characteristic that the introduction effect is accompanied when the effect button 35 is operated) from being spoiled.

Then, after the first decorative member 33a (directing accessory) returns to its original position, as shown in FIG. 68(m), an SP reach title image SRG indicating that the game has shifted to SP reach is displayed. This SP reach title image SRG constitutes the above-described title announcement effect, and the example in FIG. 68(m) indicates that it is displayed in the "normal color" in FIG. 43(a).

Then, as shown in FIG. 68(n), it suggests what icon to release. In FIG. 68(n), an icon release image HG (here, "color UP icon KG2") is displayed.

As shown in FIGS. 68(m) and 68(n), the "gimmick activation icon KG1" is deleted because the effect corresponding to release has already been executed in FIG. 68(l).
It should be noted that the executed icon does not have to be deleted. For example, the icon may be displayed in a lighter color than the icon that is not released.
Erasing executed icons has the advantage of making the remaining emitted icons easier to understand visually. Each has advantages such as being easier to understand.

Then, as shown in FIG. 68(o), the color of the SP reach title image SRG is changed. In other words, the above-described effect corresponding to the release of the released icon is executed. Here, it indicates that it is displayed in “blue” in FIG. 43(a). It should be noted that the time from the display of the icon to be released in FIG. 68(n) to the presentation corresponding to release in FIG. .

Then, as shown in FIG. 68(p), the SP ready-to-win title image SRG is erased, and an SP ready-to-win showdown effect is displayed. As shown in FIGS. 68(o) and 68(p), the "color UP icon KG2" is also deleted because the effect corresponding to release has already been executed in FIG. 68(n).

Then, as shown in FIG. 69(q), it suggests what icon to release. Here, it is suggested which of the ``gimmick activation icon'', ``button push icon'', and ``color up icon'' will appear from the ``? icon KG3''. Therefore, the suggestions include the suggestions described with reference to FIGS. 68(k) and (n) and the suggestion of making one of the icons appear from the "? icon KG3" as shown in FIG. 69(q). In particular, in the suggestion to make one of the icons appear from the "? icon KG3", once the player is made to recognize which icon is to be released by making the suggestion, the effect corresponding to release is executed. It is meaningful to carry out the suggestion because it can be done. In FIG. 69(q), icon release images HG (here, "? icon KG3" to "button PUSH icon HG") are released and displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 69(r), the image display device 31 displays an operation prompting image SG for prompting the operation of the effect button 35 and an image "Push!" to be displayed.

Then, when the player operates the effect button 35, as shown in FIG. 69(s), the above-described post-release corresponding effect for the released icon is executed. Note that FIG. 69(s) shows that a cut-in effect has been executed (a cut-in image CI is displayed) as the post-release corresponding effect. In addition, in the example of FIG.69(s), it has shown that it is displayed with "red" in FIG.43(b).

In the example of the cut-in effect in FIG. 69, the cut-in effect is executed when the effect button 35 is operated by the player, but the cut-in effect may be executed even if the effect button 35 is not operated. However, the cut-in effect may not be executed if the effect button 35 is not operated.

Then, as shown in FIG. 69(t), it suggests what icon to release. Note that, in FIG. 69(t), an icon release image HG (here, "button PUSH icon KG4") is released and displayed.
As shown in FIG. 69(t), in the first stock effect, all the acquired icons are released in the acquired variable effect.

Then, as shown in FIG. 69(u), an introductory effect is executed in which an image simulating the effect button 35 is gradually displayed. In the introductory effect, the operation effective period of the effect button 35 is not set.

Then, as shown in FIG. 69(v), the image display device 31 displays an operation prompting image SG prompting the operation of the effect button 35 and an image "Push!" to be displayed.

Then, when the player operates the effect button 35, as shown in FIG. 69(w), the first decorative member 33a (effect accessory) is activated as a post-release corresponding effect for the released icon (button PUSH icon). It moves (falls) downward (that is, executes ``determining performance 1'' at the time of big win), temporarily stops the performance pattern 38 at ``333'', and informs that the big win lottery result is a big win.
In addition, FIG. 69(w) constitutes the determination effect 1 executed when the jackpot lottery result is a jackpot.

Then, after the first decorative member 33a (staging accessory) returns to its original position, as shown in FIG. Then, it is notified that the jackpot lottery result is a jackpot.

In the example of the decision effect 1 in FIG. 69, when the player operates the effect button 35, the decision effect 1 is executed. Effect 1 is always determined by the operation of 35 or the lapse of the operation valid period.
That is, when releasing the "button push icon", if the production button 35 is not operated, the corresponding production after release is not executed (for example, cut-in production), and regardless of whether the production button 35 is operated or not, It is possible to construct a case where a corresponding effect is executed (for example, a determined effect 1).

Note that the examples shown in FIGS. 68(k), (n) and FIGS. 69(q), (t) correspond to the "release effect", and the release corresponding effects shown in FIGS. 68(l), (o), The post-release corresponding effects shown in FIGS. 69(s) and (w) correspond to "predetermined effects".

FIG. 70 shows another example of effect. FIGS. 70(a) and 70(b) are examples of effects showing that the "color UP icon" is released to indicate that the variation icon color change has occurred. Similarly, icons are displayed (here, "color UP icon HG" is displayed). In addition, FIG. 70(a) shows that the "green" variable icon is displayed in the variable icon display area 31c.

Then, as shown in FIG. 70(b), when the variable icon displayed in the variable icon display area 31c changes from "green" to "red", the color change of the variable icon is completed. It should be noted that the time from the display of the icon to be released in FIG. 70(a) to the performance corresponding to release in FIG. .

Figures 70 (v-1), (w-1), and (x-1) are different from the case of the big win described in Figures 69 (v), (w), and (x), and the case where the big win lottery result is a loss. Shows an example of the production of. In particular, in FIG. 70(w-1), as a post-release effect for the released icon (button PUSH icon), an image SMG imitating smoke is displayed without activating the first decorative member 33a (effect accessory). is displayed, and the production pattern 38 is temporarily stopped at "323" to notify that the big winning lottery result is a loss. In other words, FIG. 70(w-1) constitutes the determination effect 1 that is executed when the big winning lottery result is a loss.

FIGS. 71(c-1) and (d-1) show another example when the icons shown in FIGS. 67(c) and (d) are acquired, and FIGS. (n) and (o) refer to (k), (l), (n) and (o) of FIG. 68 as they are, and show examples of effects when icons are released.
That is, as shown in FIGS. 67(c) and 67(d), one icon can be acquired at one acquisition opportunity (for example, by operating the effect button 35 once), and the icon shown in FIG. 71(c) As indicated by -1) and (d-1), a plurality of items may be obtained with one acquisition opportunity (for example, by operating the effect button 35 once).
The plurality here may be a plurality of icons of the same type (for example, two color UP) or a plurality of different types of icons (for example, gimmick activation and color UP).
Depending on the type of icon, a plurality of icons can be acquired with one acquisition opportunity (for example, by operating the production button 35 once), and some icons can be acquired with one acquisition opportunity (for example, by pressing the production button 35 once). There may be some items that cannot be acquired more than once (by operation). For example, a plurality of color UP icons may be acquired with one acquisition opportunity, and a plurality of gimmick activation icons may not be acquired with one acquisition opportunity.
On the other hand, when releasing icons, as shown in (k), (l), (n), and (o), a plurality of icons are not released at the same time, but are released one by one. It is possible to release the next icon after the completion of the release corresponding effect and the post-release corresponding effect.
With such a configuration, when an icon is acquired, a plurality of icons may be acquired at the same time with one acquisition opportunity, so that the player can be given the feeling of having obtained the icon.
On the other hand, when the icon is released, it is released one by one, and the next icon can be released after the corresponding effect at the time of release or the corresponding effect after release of the released icon is completed, so that the released icon can be released. It is possible to make it easy for the player to recognize what kind of performance the time corresponding performance and the after release corresponding performance were.
In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling lost due to the plurality of acquired icons being released at the same time.

It should be noted that the configuration is not limited to the above, and it may be configured such that only one icon is acquired with one acquisition opportunity, or that only a plurality of icons are acquired with one acquisition opportunity, or the icon A plurality of them may be released simultaneously at the time of release.

Also, in FIGS. 68 and 69, as an example, icons are released in order from the first acquired icon, but may be released at random. For example, the icon acquired last may be released first. This makes it possible to add surprise.

Also, when a plurality of icons are acquired, it is not necessary to release all of them before the end of the variable effect. In other words, the variable effect may be terminated while there are still unreleased icons.
Also, the release expectation level may be additionally displayed for each icon. For example, a numerical value indicating the degree of release expectation may be additionally displayed, the color of the icon (eg, gold, red, green, blue) may represent the degree of release expectation, or multiple types of character images (eg, The degree of release expectation may be expressed by additionally displaying any character image from excellent, good, acceptable, etc.). Icons having a low numerical value indicating the degree of release expectation, a color with a low degree of release expectation, or an icon additionally displayed with a character image having a low degree of release expectation may be configured to be unreleased.
If all the acquired icons are released, it is assumed that a skilled player will be able to predict what kind of effect will be performed. If so, even a skilled player will find it difficult to predict what kind of performance will be performed, and it is possible to prevent the loss of interest in the game.

In addition, although the icon is released, the effect corresponding to release may not be executed. For example, although the "button PUSH icon" is released, the operation promotion image SG may not be displayed, and the operation effective period of the effect button 35 may not be set.
Also, the first stock effect may be performed at the same time as the timer effect described above, or may not be performed at the same time as the timer effect.

(Diagram explaining icons in the second stock effect)
Next, an example of icons in the second stock effect will be described with reference to FIG.
Since the basic configuration of the figure (at the time of icon acquisition, etc.) is the same as that of FIG. 66, the description of the basic configuration is omitted.

First, FIG. 72(a) shows an example of a normal icon, and shows two types of "single button press" and "multiple button presses" as examples of the normal icon.
"Single button press" indicates that an operation prompting effect is generated to prompt the player to press the effect button 35 (once). , it is possible to recognize in advance that an effect of pressing (single hit) the effect button 35 will occur as an effect corresponding to release.
Here, the icon described as "single button press" is the same as the icon described as "button push" described with reference to FIG. However, since they are used in different stock effects, an icon marked "button push" is displayed in the first stock effect, and an icon marked "button single hit" is displayed in the second stock effect. . With this configuration, it is possible to recognize from the icon which stock effect is being executed (and which game state is being played).
In addition, not limited to this, since the second stock effect is an effect that can be executed in a high probability time-saving gaming state, for example, the number of games in the high probability time-saving gaming state 1 to 39 times (for example, the first effect mode) , so as to display an icon marked "single button hit", and the number of games in the high-probability time-saving game state 40 to 80 times (for example, the second production mode) is an icon marked "1 button" may be displayed, and the display modes of the icons may be varied even in the same high-probability time-saving gaming state. By configuring in this way, it is also possible to grasp how much the high-probability time-saving gaming state is being played from the display mode of the icon.
In addition, "single button press" corresponds to "press (single hit) effect of effect button 35" as a corresponding effect at the time of release, and "produce tenpai effect" and "determine effect 2 occur" as corresponding effects after release. is doing. That is, as shown in the "remarks", the corresponding effect at the time of release is "single target", and the corresponding effect after release is "multiple targets".

“Button mashing” indicates that an operation prompting effect is generated that prompts the player to press (continuously mash) the effect button 35, and the player who acquires the icon labeled “Button mashing” It is possible to recognize in advance that an effect of pressing (continuously hitting) the effect button 35 will occur as an effect corresponding to release.
In addition, "button repeated hits" corresponds to "pressing (continuous hitting) effect of effect button 35" as a corresponding effect at the time of release, and "produce tenpai effect" and "determine effect 2 occur" as corresponding effects after release. is doing. That is, as shown in the "remarks", the corresponding effect at the time of release is "single target", and the corresponding effect after release is "multiple targets".

Since such a "single button hit icon" and "button repeated icon" are positioned in the same manner as the "button push icon" in the first stock effect, as shown in FIG. It is defined as Of course, like the "button push icon" in the first stock effect, it may be regarded as "clear" or "unclear".

In the second stock effect, only two types of icons are shown for convenience of explanation, but more than one type of icon may be provided, and there may be a "clear" one like the first stock effect. However, there may be "unclear" ones.

(Production example of the second stock production)
Next, an example of the second stock effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 73 to 76. FIG. In other words, FIGS. 73 to 76 show display modes of the image display device 31 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state in which the second stock effect can be executed. In addition, in the image display device 31, only those required for the explanation of the second stock effect are described, and some of them are omitted as appropriate (for example, the small effect symbol 48, etc.).

Figures 73(a) to (d) assume that the variable effect pattern 51 is determined, and Figures 73(e) to (h) also assume that the variable effect pattern 51 is determined.
First, as shown in FIG. 73(a), the image display device 31 variably displays the effect pattern 38, and the normal variation in the variable effect pattern 51 is performed. In addition, since it is a high-probability time-saving gaming state, a right-handed hitting promotion image MG is displayed, and a plurality of reserved icons are displayed in the second reserved icon display area 31b.
Although not particularly shown in FIG. 73, the variable icon displayed in the variable icon display area 31c and the suspended icon displayed in the second suspended icon display area 31b are similar to the variable icon and the suspended icon in the normal game state. The icon and display mode are different. It is assumed that the display modes are different, for example, the shapes are the same but the colors are different, or the shapes themselves are different.

Then, as shown in FIG. 73(b), an operation prompting image SG for prompting the operation of the effect button 35 is displayed on the image display device 31 when the normal variation is performed. Then, along with the operation of the effect button 35 or the elapse of the effective period of operation, an image is displayed to notify that the icon acquisition image KG (here, "button single-press icon") in the second stock effect has been acquired (see FIG. 73 ( c) see).

In addition, in the second stock effect, when the icon acquisition image KG is displayed, an icon acquisition sound is also output. If it is a ``single-button-press icon'', a sound like ``Pong♪'' is output from the voice output device 32. FIG. In the case of the "button repeated icon", the voice output device 32 outputs a sound such as "Kakeen♪" (see FIG. 73(g)). It is possible to grasp whether it has been acquired.
The reason why different winning sounds are output depending on the icon is that, in the high-probability time-saving gaming state in which the second stock effect is performed, whether the game ball passes through the normal symbol gate 13 in addition to winning the starting gate. As compared with the normal game state, the time for continuously watching the image display device 31 tends to be shorter. Therefore, by outputting different acquired sounds depending on the icon as shown in FIG. be.

Then, as shown in FIG. 73(d), the variable effect related to the variable effect pattern 51 is finished, and the effect symbol 38 is stopped and displayed. Even if the effect symbol 38 is stopped and displayed, the "single-button-press icon KG1" obtained in FIG. there is That is, the obtained icon is carried over from FIG. 73(e) onward, and in the example of FIG. 73, a pattern is described in which the icon is obtained with multiple variations using the advance determination table.

Incidentally, in the second stock effect as well, it is of course possible to acquire icons in a short-term concentrated manner as shown in FIG.
Alternatively, only the first stock effect may be acquired in a short-term concentration, or only the second stock effect may be acquired in a short-term concentration.
In addition, in the second stock effect as well, it may be arranged such that a plurality of stocks can be obtained with one acquisition opportunity (for example, with one operation of the effect button 35).
Also, in the second stock effect, depending on the type of icon, a plurality of icons can be obtained with one acquisition opportunity (for example, with one operation of the production button 35), and one with one acquisition opportunity (for example, A single operation of the effect button 35 may not be able to obtain a plurality of items. For example, it may be possible to acquire a plurality of button single-press icons with one acquisition opportunity, and may not be able to acquire a plurality of button repeated-press icons with one acquisition opportunity.

In addition, in the second stock effect, one acquisition opportunity (for example, one operation of the effect button 35) may be used to acquire one button repeated icon and a plurality of button single-press icons.
In addition, in the second stock effect, the number of icons that can be acquired with one acquisition opportunity (for example, by operating the effect button 35 once) may be larger or smaller than in the first stock effect. .
Further, in the second stock effect, the icon may be acquired even when the effect symbol 38 is temporarily stopped or when the effect symbol 38 is stopped and displayed.
In addition, in the second stock effect, if the icon is not used and the game is shifted to the jackpot game, the unused icon may be used in the variation effect after the jackpot is finished.

Then, as shown in FIG. 73(e), the variable effect according to the variable effect pattern 51 is newly started, and in FIG. 73(f), as in FIG. is displayed. Then, along with the operation of the effect button 35 or the elapse of the effective period of operation, an image notifying that the icon acquisition image KG in the second stock effect (here, "button repeated button icon") is acquired is displayed (FIG. 73 ( g)).
As described above, in FIG. 73(g), the voice output device 32 outputs a sound such as "Kakein♪", which is an acquired sound for notifying that the "button repeated icon" has been acquired.
In addition, if it is a "button repeated icon", it will output an acquired sound such as "Kakeen♪", and if it is a "button single-pressed icon", it will output an acquired sound such as "Pong♪". In the case of "icon", an acquisition sound such as "Kakein♪" is output, and in the case of "single-button-press icon", the acquisition sound does not have to be output (no sound is acceptable).

Then, as shown in FIG. 73(h), the variable effect relating to the variable effect pattern 51 is finished, and the effect symbol 38 is stopped and displayed. Even if the effect pattern 38 is stopped and displayed, the ``single-press button icon KG1'' obtained in FIG. 73(c) and the ``continuous button-press icon KG2'' obtained in FIG. It is continuously displayed in the display area (upper left) of the device 31 .
Note that the examples shown in FIGS. 73(b), (c), (f), and (g) correspond to the "acquisition effect".

Although not shown in FIG. 73, a plurality of icon acquisition images KG of the same type may be acquired. For example, "single button press" may be obtained multiple times. In such a case, the display mode of the icon acquisition image KG (“single button press” icon) may be as follows.
For example, when two "single button press" icons are acquired, two icon acquisition images KG ("single button press" icons) are displayed.
For example, when two "single button press" icons are acquired, only one icon acquisition image KG ("single button press" icon) is displayed, and an image such as "x2" is additionally displayed on the icon acquisition image KG.
Any of these display modes may be used.
The former makes it possible to visually show that many icons have been acquired, and the latter prevents the display of a plurality of icons from occupying the display area.

In FIG. 73, the operation prompting image SG prompting the operation of the effect button 35 is displayed, and the icon is acquired according to the operation of the effect button 35 or the elapse of the operation effective period. Instead of displaying, the icon may be acquired without the operation of the effect button 35 or the expiration of the operation effective period. For example, an icon acquisition effect may be performed using a character image, and an icon may be given as a result of the effect.

74(i) to (p) assume that the variable performance pattern 82 has been determined, and FIG. 74(i) shows that the variable performance related to the variable performance pattern 82 has been started. In addition, in the display area (upper left) of the image display device 31, the ``single button hit icon KG1'' obtained in the previous variable effect and the ``continuous button hit icon KG2'' obtained in the previous variable effect continue to be displayed. is displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 74(j), it suggests what icon to release. In this suggestion, for example, the icon image is moved from the display position of the acquired icon image shown in FIG. display. At the same time, an image such as "release!" is displayed. In FIG. 74(j), an icon release image HG ("single button press" icon KG1 in this case) is displayed. In the second stock effect, as in the first stock effect, the acquisition part shown in FIG. 73 and the release part shown in FIG. It's supposed to run.

Then, as shown in FIG. 74(k), a command image saying "Press the button to hit the reach!" The image display device 31 displays an operation facilitating image SG prompting to press and an image prompting a single hit of the effect button 35 saying “Press!”.

Then, when the effect button 35 is operated (single hit) by the player, as shown in FIG. 74(l), a ten-pai effect (successful ten-pai effect) is performed as a post-release corresponding effect for the released icon (single button hit icon). Executes, and the ready-to-win effect using the "3" pattern of the effect pattern 38 is executed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 74(m), SP reach is executed, and during execution of SP reach, it is suggested what icon is to be released (see FIG. 74(n)). Note that in FIG. 74(n), an icon release image HG (here, "button repeated hitting icon KG2") is displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 74(o), a command image saying "Press the button repeatedly to drop the gimmick!" The image display device 31 displays an operation prompting image SG for prompting an operation and an image for prompting repeated hitting of the effect button 35 saying "Repeated hit!"

Then, when the effect button 35 is operated (continuously hit) by the player, as shown in FIG. 74(p), the first decorative member 33a (effect effect The object moves (falls) downward (that is, ``determined performance 2 success'' is executed), the performance pattern 38 is temporarily stopped at ``333'', and it is reported that the big win lottery result is a big win.
Although not shown in the figure, if the jackpot lottery result is a loss, the first decorative member 33a (effect The image SMG (see FIG. 70 (w-1)) simulating smoke is displayed without activating the function), the performance pattern 38 is temporarily stopped at "323", and the big winning lottery result is a loss. to be notified. In other words, "determined effect 2 failure" is executed.

Note that the examples shown in FIGS. 74(j) and (n) correspond to the "release effect", and the release corresponding effects shown in FIGS. 74(k) and (o) and the release effects shown in FIGS. The post response effect corresponds to the "predetermined effect".

FIG. 75 shows an effect example of the acquired icon change effect that can be executed in the second stock effect. Note that FIG. 75 will be described with an example in which the acquired icon change effect is executed in the scenes of (i) and (j) in FIG. 74 .

First, as shown in FIG. 75(i-1), in the display area (lower right) of the image display device 31, a mini character image mc is displayed. Then, an effect of performing an action on the obtained "single-button-press icon KG2" from the mini-character image mc (specifically, a light-ray image is emitted from the mini-character mc to the single-button-press icon KG2) is executed.

Then, as a result of the effect, as shown in FIG. 75(i-2), an image in which the ``single-press button icon KG2'' is changed to a ``continuous button-press icon KG2'' and an image saying ``change!'' are displayed. , the voice output device 32 outputs the acquisition sound "Kakein♪" that is output when the "button repeated icon" is acquired. As a result, it can be understood that the "button repeated hitting icon" has been acquired.
As described above, since the degree of expectation for a big win is single hit<repeated hits, by performing such an acquired icon change effect, the player's expectation for a big win game is increased. can be improved.
In addition, since it becomes difficult to predict what kind of effect will be performed after the icon is acquired by performing such an already-acquired icon change effect, a further improvement in the effect interest can be expected.
Then, in FIGS. 75(n) and (o), similarly to FIGS. 74(n) and (o), the "button repeated hitting icon" is released, and an effect corresponding to release of the released icon is executed.

75(i-1) and (i-2) show the successful pattern of the acquired icon change effect, but (i-2) has a failure pattern in which the "single button press icon KG2" does not change. may
Also, a pattern that changes from the "button repeated icon" to the "button single-press icon" may be provided.

FIG. 76 shows another example of release in the second stock effect. (c), (d), (g), (h), and (i) in FIG. 76 correspond to (c), (d), (g), (h), and (i) in FIGS. Since it is the same, the explanation is omitted. Then, in the scenes of (j) and (k) in FIG. 74, the effects shown in FIGS. 76(j−1) and (k−1) are performed.
That is, it indicates that the "button repeated icon KG2" acquired in FIG. 76(g) is released before the "button single-press icon KG1" acquired in FIG. 76(c). By configuring in this way, it becomes difficult to predict what kind of presentation will be performed after the icon is acquired, so further improvement in presentation interest can be expected.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 77 and 78, the third stock effect, which is different from the above-described second stock effect, will be described.
The third stock effect is a stock effect that can be executed in a high-probability time-saving gaming state, for example, a stock effect that can be executed in place of the second stock effect or together with the second stock effect.
Also, the upper limit number of icons to be acquired in the third stock effect is "4".
Further, the third stock effect has a case where one icon can be acquired with one acquisition opportunity (for example, by one operation of the effect button 35) and a case where a plurality of icons can be acquired.
It should be noted that the acquisition opportunity is generated four times in total, and when the icon is acquired, the effect button 35 is operated four times in total to acquire the icon. Also, even if the number of acquired icons reaches the upper limit of 4, if the number of acquisition opportunities has not reached 4, icons will be acquired until the number of acquisition opportunities reaches 4. It will be.
Details will be described below.

First, in FIG. 77(a), an image saying "Press the button to get the icon!" Then, as shown in FIG. 77(b), the effect button 35 becomes operable, and the image display device 31 displays an operation prompting image SG prompting the operation of the effect button 35 and an image "Press!" .

Then, as shown in FIG. 77(c), as the effect button 35 is operated or the operation effective period elapses, the icon acquisition image KG1 (here, the "gimmick activation" icon), the icon acquisition image KG2 (here, the "gimmick activation" icon) in the third stock effect Here, an image is displayed to notify that the player has acquired the "Color UP" icon).
That is, in the example of FIG. 77(c), it is shown that a plurality of icons are obtained at the same time with one acquisition opportunity (for example, by one operation of the effect button 35).

Then, after FIG. 77(c), the effect shown in FIG. 77(b) is performed again, and as shown in FIG. ), and an image notifying that the icon acquisition image KG4 (here, the “button PUSH” icon) has been acquired is displayed.
That is, in the example of FIG. 77(d), it is shown that a plurality of icons are obtained at the same time with one acquisition opportunity (for example, by one operation of the effect button 35).
At this point, the acquisition opportunity has occurred "2" times, and although "4" times have not been reached, the number of icons has reached "4", which is the upper limit number of acquisitions. Therefore, after that, the effect shown in FIG. 77(b) is performed twice.

That is, as shown in FIG. 77(e), although the icon acquisition images KG1 to KG4 are displayed, the effect button 35 becomes operable, and the image display device 31 displays an operation prompting image prompting the operation of the effect button 35. SG and the image "Push!" are displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 77(f), it is notified that the icon acquisition image KG5 (here, "gimmick activation" icon) in the third stock effect has been acquired with the operation of the effect button 35 or the elapse of the operation valid period. image is displayed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 77(g), although the icon acquisition images KG1 to KG4 and the icon acquisition image KG5 are displayed, the effect button 35 becomes operable, and the image display device 31 displays the effect button 35. An operation prompting image SG prompting an operation and an image "Push!" are displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 77(h), it is notified that the icon acquisition image KG6 (here, the "color UP" icon) in the third stock effect has been acquired with the operation of the effect button 35 or the elapse of the operation effective period. image is displayed.
Note that the "acquisition effect", "suggestion", "release effect", and "predetermined effect" are positioned in the same manner as the above-described second stock effect.

That is, even if the number of acquired icons reaches the upper limit number of icons, if there is still an acquisition opportunity, the acquisition opportunity is generated, and the icon acquired by the generated acquisition opportunity is also displayed on the image display device 31. (KG5 and KG6 in the example of FIG. 77). As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling a sense of incongruity or feeling lost.

Then, as shown in FIG. 78(i), an icon release image HG (here, "button PUSH icon KG4") after releasing KG1 to KG3 is released and displayed. KG5 and KG6 have not yet been released.

Then, as shown in FIG. 78(j), an introductory effect is performed, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. In other words, it is notified that the jackpot lottery result was a loss. Then, after temporarily stopping at "323" in the production pattern 38 in FIG. 78(l), it is stopped and displayed in FIG. 78(m). Then, after that, the next variable effect shown in FIG. 78(n) is started.
Note that the icon acquisition images KG5 and KG6 that have not been released are displayed until (i) to (l) in FIG. be. That is, they are erased without being emitted.

As described above, in the third stock effect, even when the number of acquired icons reaches the upper limit, if there is still an acquisition opportunity and the acquisition opportunity occurs, more icons are given to the player. On the other hand, after reaching the upper limit, the attached icon will not be released. That is, after reaching the upper limit, only a visual icon was given.
As a result, although the icon given after reaching the upper limit is not released, the icon itself is given, so that the player can be given a certain sense of satisfaction when the icon is obtained.

(Regarding the contrast between the timer effect and the stock effect)
Here, the above-described timer effect and the above-described stock effect (for example, the first stock effect) are compared. That is, in the first stock effect, the acquisition part and release part are never mixed, and for example, a new icon is not acquired while the release part is being executed.
On the other hand, the timer effect is, for example, in FIG. 59(b), the SP reach generation timer effect is started from the standby display during T2 to T4 or without the standby display, and ends at T4. explained. That is, in T2 to T4 of FIG. 59(b), when the icon change timer is running, the standby display related to the SP reach generation timer effect may be started. That is, in the example of FIG. 59(b), it can be said that the stock of a new timer effect (SP reach generation timer effect) is performed after the execution of the icon change timer is started.
Therefore, when the release part of the first stock effect is executed (at least 1 icon is released), the stock of icons does not increase, but when the timer effect of 1 is executed, the stock of the timer effect increases. It is a comparison result that there is something to do. By providing such performances with different characteristics, it is possible to further improve the performance interest. Specifically, as described in the description of the "timer icon", the timer effect can be understood from the "timer icon", and it can be seen that the timer time is being subtracted, and it is "0 seconds left". It is possible to recognize the execution time of the performance to be performed later.
On the other hand, since it is possible to grasp the end time of the timer effect itself, some players may have a disappointing feeling (concern) that "the timer effect will end."
Therefore, as described in the example of FIG. 59(b), by making it possible to execute a new timer effect even after the execution of the timer effect, the above concerns can be resolved.
On the other hand, in the stock effect, as described with reference to FIG. 66, the execution time of the effect cannot be recognized from the icon. Therefore, since the end time of the stock effect cannot be clearly grasped, the above-mentioned concern itself is less likely to occur. Therefore, it is assumed that no new icons are acquired when executing the release part.
In this manner, whether or not to add a new icon is determined according to the respective characteristics of the "timer effect" and the "stock effect", which can be said to lead to further enhancement of the effect's interest.

Also, the stock effect (for example, the first stock effect) is, for example, as described with reference to FIGS. I tried to move to the execution of the corresponding production.
On the other hand, the timer effect is, for example, as described in FIG. set it to run. In other words, although it is suggested that some kind of effect is started, the execution of the variable icon change effect is started without suggesting the specific content of the effect (the variable icon change effect in the example of FIG. 62(d)). did.
By configuring in this way, it is possible to recognize in advance what kind of effect will be executed in the future (stock effect) and when it is not possible to recognize in advance what kind of effect will be executed in the future (timer effect). Since it can be constructed, it is possible to further improve the entertainment and entertainment of the production by producing a variety of productions.

The first stock effect, the second stock effect, and the third stock effect have been described above, but the contents of the above description are only examples, and for example, they may be configured as follows.

In the above explanation, the acquired icon image is displayed on the image display device 31 .
Alternatively, if a display device other than the image display device 31 (so-called “sub-liquid crystal”) is provided, the acquisition icon may be displayed on the separate display device. With this configuration, it is not necessary to reduce the display content of the image display device 31 by displaying the acquisition icon or to hide it, thereby preventing deterioration in visibility.

Further, when the other display device described above is provided, an effect related to icon acquisition (for example, display of an operation promotion image SG) and an effect related to release of an icon (for example, display of an icon release image HG) can be displayed as an image. The display device 31 may be used to display the unreleased icons, and another display device may be used to display the icons. With this configuration, the image display device 31 is used in the main scenes (acquisition scene, release scene), so that the player can be prevented from overlooking the main scenes.

In the above explanation, the acquired icon image is displayed on the image display device 31 .
Not limited to this, acquisition may be notified by a performance accessory (such as the first decorative member 33a) and an LED or the like provided to the performance accessory. For example, like the character images A to D described above, production accessories A to D are provided, and each production accessory is equipped with an LED. Then, when "gimmick operation" is acquired, the LED of director A or director D is lit from non-lighting, and when "button PUSH" is acquired, the LED of director B or director D is turned on. When the LED of the performance accessory B or the performance accessory D is turned on from the non-lighting state, the acquisition is expressed when the "color UP" is obtained by lighting the non-lighting state. With this configuration, it is not necessary to reduce the display content of the image display device 31 by displaying the acquisition icon or to hide it, thereby preventing deterioration in visibility.

In addition, when expressing acquisition with the above-mentioned production accessories and LEDs, the production related to acquisition (for example, display of operation promotion image SG, etc.) and the production related to release (for example, display of icon release image HG, etc.) are displayed as images. It may be performed by the device 31, and the expression of the unreleased one may be performed by the performance accessory and the LED. With this configuration, the image display device 31 is used in the main scenes (acquisition scene, release scene), so that the player can be prevented from overlooking the main scenes.

In addition, the acquisition may be expressed simply by the performance accessory. For example, if the production accessories A to D are provided, and if "gimmick operation" is acquired, the production accessory A is moved from the first position to the second position, and if "button PUSH" is acquired, the production role Object B is moved from the first position to the second position, and when "color UP" is obtained, the effect accessory C is moved from the first position to the second position, and the effect accessory D is moved to the first position. In the case of moving from the position of 1 to the second position, acquisition may be expressed by constructing it so as to correspond to any of "gimmick activation", "button push", and "color up". By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it easier to recognize the acquisition status than expressing the acquisition with a display object.

Acquisition may also be represented by sound output from the audio output device 32 . In addition, when expressing acquisition by sound, for example, the output song may be changed according to the number of acquired icons, and the output song is only when you have the "gimmick activation" icon. There may be. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide auditory enjoyment according to the acquisition status of icons.

In the above description, the icons for the amount of rewards earned are displayed.
Instead of displaying the icon, the number may simply be displayed. For example, if the acquisition is 4, then if it is an icon, it will display 4 icons, but if it is a number, it can simply display 4, and then subtract the number according to the release. By configuring in this way, the display area to be used can be reduced.

In the above description, the acquisition icon image is displayed.
It is not limited to this, and may be displayed as an acquired character image. For example, character image A corresponds to "gimmick actuation", character image B corresponds to "button push", character image C corresponds to "color up", character image D corresponds to "gimmick actuation", "button push". ”, and “color up”. In this case, it is not necessary to clearly indicate the content of the presentation to each character. For example, the character A image does not have to indicate "gimmick activation". With this configuration, it is possible to draw attention to which character image is to be acquired. Further, by repeating the game, it is possible to grasp which character corresponds to which effect (for example, "gimmick activation", etc.), so that the operation of the gaming machine 1 can be prolonged.

In addition, when the acquired character image is displayed, there may be an effect common to a plurality of characters. For example, for character image A, "gimmick activation" and "color up" correspond, and for character image C, "button push" and "color up" correspond. "Color UP" may be executed when image C is acquired. With this configuration, it becomes difficult to predict the effect to be executed, compared to the case where the character image and the corresponding effect are 1:1.

In addition, when displaying with an acquired character image, acquisition may be indirectly expressed by displaying an item image related to the character image. For example, character image A is associated with an "item image imitating a sword", character image B is associated with an "item image imitating a gun", and character image C is associated with an "item image imitating a spear". Character image D is associated with an "item image imitating a bow", character image A is associated with "gimmick operation", character image B is associated with "button push", and character image C is associated with " Color UP", and the character image D corresponds to ``gimmick activation'', ``button push'', and ``color UP''. , or an “item image imitating a bow” may be given. Also in this case, it is not necessary to clearly indicate the effect content on each item image. According to this configuration, by repeatedly playing the game, it is possible to find out the relationship between the item image, the character image, and the content of the effect, thereby improving the interest in the game.

In the above explanation, the icon acquisition part is executed, and then the icon release part is executed, and it is assumed that these parts are not mixed.
Not limited to this, the icon acquisition part and the icon release part may be mixed. For example, a new icon may be acquired while performing the release part. With this configuration, for example, it is possible to help a player who is disappointed because there are few winning icons in the winning part.

In the above description, the acquired icon image is displayed and the released icon is erased. In particular, it did not provide any additional display to the acquired icon image.
Not limited to this, some additional display may be performed on the acquired icon image. For example, an additional display such as "Standby" may be displayed to indicate that the fuel will be released from now on. With this configuration, the player can easily recognize that the icon with the additional display of "Standby" will be released in the future.

In the above description, when icons are acquired by multiple variations using the preliminary determination table, the acquired icon images are displayed in the display area (upper) of the image display device 31 .
Without being limited to this, the obtained icon image may be additionally displayed in a small size to the pending icon corresponding to the variable effect in which the icon is released.
It should be noted that in the case of displaying in addition to the pending icon, the display area is limited due to the presence of adjacent pending icons and the like. Therefore, a simple additional display such as "stock x 4" may be displayed. According to this configuration, it is possible to easily understand in which variation effect the icon is released by confirming the additionally displayed reserved icon.

In addition, it may be suggested in advance that the stock effect is performed by the pending icon itself. For example, in addition to the icons described in FIGS. 34 and 35, an icon such as "stock" may be provided, and the icon such as "stock" may be displayed from the preliminary change stage of FIG. Then, when the icon such as "stock" changes, the acquisition effect described in FIG. 67 or the like may be performed without fail or with a high probability. With such a configuration, it is possible to have an expectation that a jackpot game will be given when an icon such as "stock" is displayed as a reserved icon because of the characteristic that the stock effect is easily executed at the time of the jackpot. can.

In the above description, the icons acquired and released in the stock effect are those shown in FIGS. 66 and 72, and those described in the descriptions of FIGS.
Not limited to this, it may have a character icon. For example, character icons A to D are provided, and when character icon A is acquired and released, a jackpot announcement effect or ready-to-win effect corresponding to character A written on character icon A is executed, and character icon B is acquired and released. Then, a big hit announcement effect or a ready-to-win effect corresponding to the character B written on the character icon B may be executed. With this configuration, it is possible to make the user more interested in what kind of icon can be obtained when the icon is obtained.

Also, there may be a stock effect that acquires and releases only one icon. For example, only four "color UP" icons may be acquired, and then four may be released one by one to change the color of the title announcement effect or the variable icon. With this configuration, it is possible to recognize that an event such as a color change is being performed intensively, so that the performance interest can be further improved.

In the above description, there are multiple types of icons that can be acquired.
The number of icons that can be acquired is not limited to this, and may be one. When the number of icons that can be acquired is one, a plurality of icons can be acquired with one acquisition opportunity, and when the icons accumulate up to a predetermined number, a predetermined effect is executed. With this configuration, it is possible to provide the fun of accumulating icons.

(Regarding the performance during the jackpot game)
Here, with reference to FIG. 79, the effect performed during the jackpot game will be mentioned.
In the present embodiment, as explained in FIG. 7, after all the jackpot games are completed, the high probability game state is determined until the jackpot lottery is performed 80 times. Therefore, during the jackpot game, an effect (so-called "promotion effect") for informing whether the state after the end of the jackpot game is the normal game state or the high-probability game state is not performed. There was a possibility that it might give a feeling of boredom.
Therefore, during the jackpot game, as shown in FIG. 79, an introductory image of the character or the like is displayed in a variable effect or the like.
For example, if it is the first round of the jackpot game, the image of the character A and the introduction image of the character A are displayed (see FIG. 79(a)), and if it is the second round of the jackpot game, the image of the character B and the character are displayed. The introductory image of B is displayed (see FIG. 79(b)), and if it is the third round of the jackpot game, the image of character C and the introductory image of character C are displayed (see FIG. 79(c)). As a result, the player can deepen his or her knowledge of the characters displayed in the variable presentation or the like, so that the player can enjoy the jackpot game without feeling bored.

Also, during the ending time from the end of the last round game to the end of the jackpot game, as shown in FIG. An image "RUSH Rush" is displayed.
In addition to the above images, there is also a warning image EG1 to prevent forgetting to take out a card storing value information, and a warning image EG2 to prevent excessive addiction to games. Beware of being addicted!" is displayed. As a result, it is possible to prevent forgetting to take a card and to prevent excessive play.
It should be noted that the fact that a predetermined acquisition condition is met may mean anything. For example, the winning of game balls to the first starting port 14 or the second starting port 15 may be possible.
Also, the predetermined game privilege may be of any kind. For example, it may be a pending icon or a variable icon. The pending icon and the variable icon may be the pending icon and the variable icon related to the first starting port 14, and may be the pending icon and the variable icon related to the second starting port 15.
Also, the acquisition effect may be of any kind. For example, an effect may be provided in which the image display device 31 displays the pending icon or the variable icon by winning the game ball to the first starting hole 14 or the second starting hole 15 .
Also, the release effect may be of any kind. For example, an effect of shifting the pending icon to the variable icon display area 31c may be used.
Also, the predetermined effect may be of any kind. For example, a variable effect based on a variable effect pattern may be used.
Also, the first notification mode may be of any type. For example, it may be displayed as a white icon in the pending icon or the variable icon.
Also, the second notification mode may be of any type. For example, it may be displayed as a blue icon in the pending icon or the variable icon.
Also, the specific acquired sound may be of any kind. For example, it may be a specific winning sound that is output when a game ball enters the first starting port 14 or the second starting port 15 . Further, the case where the specific winning sound is not output may be a normal winning sound that is output when the game ball enters the first starting hole 14 or the second starting hole 15 .

Note that the display contents of FIG. 79(d) may be changed as appropriate. For example, when the game machine 1 is equipped with a "set value function", depending on the type of character image displayed in FIG. good.
Here, the "set value function" consists of, for example, six stages of set values, and the ratio of determination as a big win in the big win lottery differs for each stage. For example, if it is a low probability game state with a set value of 1, "1/320", if it is a low probability game state with a set value of 2, it is "1/310", ... If it is a low probability game state with a set value of 6 The ratio is "1/270", and the set value 6 is the most advantageous set value for the player. Any one of the six levels of set values can be set by the game parlor (administrator of the game machine 1). By installing such set values, it is possible to manage the ball output with some degree of predictability according to the set set values.
79(d) is used as a default image that does not particularly suggest setting values, and a plurality of types of images suggesting setting values are used. Remember. Then, as an image to be displayed during the ending time from the end of the last round game to the end of the jackpot game, a default image or an image suggesting the setting value is selected according to the setting value currently set in the gaming machine 1. is determined based on a predetermined probability. As a result, it is possible to display an image suggesting the set value during the ending time from the end of the last round game to the end of the jackpot game. By configuring in this way, when the gaming machine 1 is equipped with the "set value function", it is possible to prevent the player from feeling bored during the jackpot game including the ending time.

(About production of high-probability time-saving game state)
In addition, although not shown in particular, the production performed in the high-probability time-saving gaming state will also be mentioned.
As described above, in the present embodiment, 80 high-probability time-saving gaming states are performed. That is, when the jackpot lottery is performed 80 times in the high-probability time-saving game state and the jackpot game is not won, the high-probability time-saving game state ends.
Therefore, even in the performance performed in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, it is possible to further improve the game interest by making it different according to the number of games in the high-probability time-saving gaming state.
For example, until the end of the high-probability time-saving gaming state, up to 40 times, which is relatively easy, it is difficult to execute the reach performance (losing), and if it is losing, it is easy to execute the shortening variation. It is possible to digest the variable production.
On the other hand, after the 41st turn, when the end of the high-probability time-saving gaming state is approaching, compared to up to 40 times, it is easier to execute the reach production (losing), and the fluctuation production takes a relatively long time. can be digested. Also, after 41 rotations, the BGM may be changed to an up-tempo song to suggest that the high-probability time-saving gaming state is coming to an end.
In addition, what kind of thing may be sufficient as a 1st game privilege? For example, the right to execute the jackpot determination process shown in FIG. 21 may be used. Also, the variable icon or the pending icon obtained by winning the game ball to the second starting port 15 may be used.
Moreover, what kind of thing may be sufficient as a 2nd game privilege? For example, a prize ball whose payout is controlled by the payout control board 130 may be used. Also, the variable icon or the pending icon obtained by winning the game ball to the first starting port 14 may be used.
Moreover, what kind of thing may be sufficient as a privilege? For example, a prize ball whose payout is controlled by the payout control board 130 may be used.
Moreover, what kind of thing may be sufficient as a 1st privilege? For example, the right to execute the jackpot determination process shown in FIG. 21 may be used.
Moreover, what kind of thing may be sufficient as a 2nd privilege? For example, a prize ball whose payout is controlled by the payout control board 130 may be used.
Also, the first acquired state may be of any type. For example, it may be a state in which the auxiliary game is difficult to be performed, that is, a non-time-saving game state.
Also, the second acquired state may be of any type. For example, the state in which the auxiliary game is likely to be performed, that is, the time-saving game state may be used.
Also, the predetermined period may be any period. For example, it may be a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds).

In addition, the production performed in the high-probability time-saving gaming state is only an example, and may be changed as appropriate. For example, it is not necessary to change the presentation up to the 40th turn and after the 41st turn. Also, the presentation may be changed in increments of 10 times. Alternatively, the performance may be changed only for the remaining 10 times. In addition, since there is a comparatively margin until reaching the 40th time, the "effect suggesting the set value" described in "About the effect during the jackpot game" may be performed there.

<Regarding Other Inventions, etc. Described in the Above Embodiments>
Other inventions and the like described in the present embodiment will be described below.

In a conventional gaming machine, when a starting prize is established, determination information as to whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player is obtained, and the determination information is stored. Then, when the determination condition is established, the stored determination information is determined, and a variable performance is executed according to the result of the determination, and when the variable performance becomes a special result, a special game is executed. In the variable production, various productions are executed, and a device is made to increase the degree of expectation that the special game will be executed. And as such an effect, after stocking one or more benefits (for example, a reach pattern), by releasing the stocked benefits, there is an effect that increases the degree of expectation that the special game will be executed. (For example, see JP-A-2016-106719). However, the gaming machine described in Patent Literature 1 has room for improvement in terms of further improving the performance and entertainment.

(a) As a first configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (for example, a jackpot game) advantageous to the player, the starting area Acquisition means (e.g., main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (e.g., special figure determination information) based on entry of game balls into (e.g., first start port 14, second start port 15), Determination means (e.g., main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on determination information (e.g., jackpot determination processing), and production control means for executing a variable effect according to the result of the determination (for example, effect control board 120), and the effect control means determines that a predetermined acquisition condition is met If it is determined that the stock is executed, for example, if it is determined that the cut-in notice effect stock is executed in FIG. Acquisition effect (for example, acquisition effect shown in FIG. 67) for acquiring an icon (for example, a button PUSH icon in the case of executing stock for cut-in notice effect stock), and a predetermined release condition is satisfied after the acquisition is performed ( For example, in terms of the number of display frames from the start of the variable effect, it will be the α-th frame), and the release effect (for example, the release effect shown in FIG. 68 and FIG. 69) that releases the acquired game privilege, and the release effect (For example, if it is determined in FIG. 47 that the stock for the variable icon is to be executed, the effect of changing the color of the variable icon shown in FIG. 70(b), for example, If it is determined in 47 that the stock for the title notice effect is to be executed, the effect of changing the color of the SP reach title image SRG shown in FIG. 68(o), for example, the stock for the cut-in notice effect in FIG. cut-in effect shown in FIG. 69 (s)), and a predetermined game privilege (for example, a color UP icon, for example, a button PUSH icon) among the game privileges is the predetermined A plurality of the predetermined effects that can be executed according to the game privilege are provided (for example, if the color UP icon is provided with a plurality of effects corresponding to release as shown in FIG. 66, if the button PUSH icon is provided, a corresponding effect after release is provided. have multiple).
As a result, when a predetermined game privilege is obtained, it is possible to provide enjoyment as to what kind of predetermined performance will be executed later. Therefore, it leads to further enhancement of performance interest.

(b) As a second configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (for example, a jackpot game) advantageous to the player, the starting area Acquisition means (e.g., main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (e.g., special figure determination information) based on entry of game balls into (e.g., first start port 14, second start port 15), Determination means (e.g., main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on determination information (e.g., jackpot determination processing), and production control means for executing a variable effect according to the result of the determination (For example, effect control board 120), and the effect control means determines that a predetermined acquisition condition is met (for example, determines that stock for cut-in notice effect is executed in FIG. If it is determined that the stock for the cut-in notice effect is to be executed in FIG. 47, then the "?" icon shown in FIG. Gimmick activation icon shown in FIG. 66(a) if it is determined that the stock is to be executed. A release effect (for example, a release effect shown in FIGS. 68 and 69) for releasing the acquired game privilege when established (for example, the α-th frame in terms of the number of display frames from the start of the variable effect); A predetermined effect corresponding to the game privilege released by the release effect (for example, when it is determined to execute the development effect stock in FIG. 47, the first decorative member 33a (effect accessory) shown in FIG. 68(l) It is possible to execute an effect of moving (falling) downward, for example, an effect of pressing the effect button 35 shown in FIG. Yes, the content of the predetermined effect is suggested in the release effect (for example, the gimmick activation icon KG1 shown in FIG. 69(k) is displayed as the icon release image HG, for example, the "?" After the PUSH icon appears and is displayed as an icon release image HG) and the suggestion is executed, the predetermined effect can be executed.
As a result, the predetermined effect can be executed after making the player recognize in advance what kind of predetermined effect is to be executed, so that the player can execute the effect that is easy for the player to understand. Therefore, it leads to further enhancement of performance interest.

(c) As a third configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (for example, a jackpot game) advantageous to the player, the starting area Acquisition means (e.g., main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (e.g., special figure determination information) based on entry of game balls into (e.g., first start port 14, second start port 15), Determination means (e.g., main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on determination information (e.g., jackpot determination processing), and production control means for executing a variable effect according to the result of the determination (For example, effect control board 120), and the effect control means determines that a predetermined acquisition condition is met (for example, determines that stock for title announcement effect is executed in FIG. 47, for example, stock for development effect in FIG. 47). is executed), then a game privilege (for example, if it is determined to execute the stock for title notice effect in FIG. 47, the color UP icon shown in FIG. 66 is determined to be executed, for example, the stock for development effect is judged to be executed in FIG. gimmick activation icon if it is), and a predetermined release condition is satisfied after the acquisition (for example, acquisition effects shown in FIGS. 67 and 71) (for example, the change effect from the start of In terms of the number of display frames, it will be the α-th frame), a release effect (for example, release effects shown in FIGS. 68, 69, and 71) for releasing the acquired game privilege, and the game released by the release effect A predetermined effect corresponding to the privilege (for example, when it is determined to execute the title preview effect stock in FIG. 47, the effect of changing the color of the SP reach title image SRG shown in FIG. If it is determined that the production stock is to be executed, a production in which the first decorative member 33a (production accessory) moves (falls) downward shown in FIG. In , it is possible to acquire a plurality of the game benefits by satisfying the predetermined acquisition condition of 1 (for example, by pressing the effect button 35 once as shown in FIGS. 71 (c-1) and (d-1), A color UP icon and a gimmick activation icon can be acquired), and in the release effect, it is impossible to release a plurality of the game benefits by satisfying one of the predetermined release conditions (for example, FIG. 71 (k), ( n) only releases one at a time).
As a result, in the acquisition performance, a plurality of game benefits can be acquired by one operation of the performance button 35, so that the player can be given a feeling of winning and the feeling of expectation for the award of the big winning game can be improved. can. On the other hand, in the release effect, even if the time (or the number of display frames) set as the release timing of the icon comes, only one game privilege is released, so that the player does not feel lost. In addition, it is possible to make it easy to recognize what kind of predetermined effect has been performed for one game privilege. Therefore, it leads to further enhancement of performance interest.

(d) As a fourth configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (for example, a jackpot game) advantageous to the player, the starting area Acquisition means (e.g., main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (e.g., special figure determination information) based on entry of game balls into (e.g., first start port 14, second start port 15), Determination means (e.g., main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on determination information (e.g., jackpot determination processing), and production control means for executing a variable effect according to the result of the determination (For example, effect control board 120), and the effect control means determines that a predetermined acquisition condition is met (for example, determines that stock for cut-in notice effect is executed in FIG. 47, for example, the fluctuation icon If it is determined that the cut-in notice effect stock is to be executed in FIG. color UP icon) to acquire (for example, the acquisition effect shown in FIG. 67), and a predetermined release condition is satisfied after the acquisition is performed (for example, the start of the variable effect In terms of the number of display frames from the beginning, it will be the α-th frame), and the release effect (for example, the release effect shown in FIGS. 69 and 70) for releasing the acquired game privilege, and the game privilege released by the release effect (For example, if it is determined to execute the cut-in notice effect stock in FIG. 47, the effect of pressing the effect button 35 shown in FIG. 69 (r), for example, If it is determined that the stock is to be executed, an effect of changing the color of the variable icon shown in FIG. icon, color UP icon), the content of the predetermined effect is not clearly notified during the period from execution of the acquisition effect to execution of the release effect (for example, the "?" During the period from the execution of the acquisition effect to the execution of the release effect, the effect corresponding to release cannot be recognized. cannot be recognized).
As a result, when a predetermined game privilege is obtained, it is possible to provide enjoyment as to what kind of predetermined performance will be executed later. Therefore, it leads to further enhancement of performance interest.

(e) As a fifth configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (for example, a jackpot game) advantageous to the player, the starting area Acquisition means (e.g., main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (e.g., special figure determination information) based on entry of game balls into (e.g., first start port 14, second start port 15), Determination means (e.g., main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on determination information (e.g., jackpot determination processing), and production control means for executing a variable effect according to the result of the determination (For example, effect control board 120), and the effect control means determines that a predetermined acquisition condition is met (for example, determines that stock for cut-in notice effect is executed in FIG. If it is determined to execute the stock), then a game privilege (for example, if it is determined to execute the stock for the variation icon in FIG. 47, a color UP icon, for example, if it is determined to execute the stock for development effect in FIG. 47 is a gimmick activation icon) to obtain an acquisition effect (for example, the acquisition effect shown in FIG. 67), and a predetermined release condition is established after the acquisition is performed (for example, in terms of the number of display frames from the start of the variable effect, the α-th frame), a release effect (for example, release effects shown in FIGS. 69 and 70) for releasing the acquired game privilege, and a predetermined effect according to the game privilege released by the release effect (for example, If it is determined in FIG. 47 that the stock for the variation icon is to be executed, the production of changing the color of the variation icon shown in FIG. 70(a) is performed. effect in which the first decorative member 33a (effect accessory) moves (falls) downward, indicated by 68(l), and a predetermined game benefit (for example, shown in FIG. 66) among the game benefits color UP icon, gimmick activation icon), the content of the predetermined effect is not notified in an unclear manner during the period from execution of the acquisition effect to execution of the release effect (for example, the color UP icon It can be recognized that the color change effect is performed after execution of the acquisition effect until execution of the release effect, and the gimmick activation icon is the first decorative member 33a ( It can be recognized that the performance accessory) moves (falls) downward).
As a result, when a predetermined game privilege is obtained, the player can be made to recognize in advance what kind of predetermined effect will be executed later. Therefore, it leads to further enhancement of performance interest.

(f) As a sixth configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (for example, a jackpot game) advantageous to the player, the starting area Acquisition means (e.g., main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (e.g., special figure determination information) based on entry of game balls into (e.g., first start port 14, second start port 15), Determination means (e.g., main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on determination information (e.g., jackpot determination processing), and production control means for executing a variable effect according to the result of the determination (For example, effect control board 120), and the effect control means determines that the first acquisition condition is met (for example, determines that stock for cut-in notice effect is executed in FIG. 47, for example, develops effect in FIG. 47). 47), the first game privilege (for example, if it is determined to execute the cut-in notice effect stock in FIG. 47, the button PUSH icon shown in FIG. 66, for example, the development effect Gimmick activation icon if it is determined to execute the stock) acquisition effect (for example, acquisition effect shown in FIG. 67), and a predetermined release condition is established after the acquisition is performed (for example, variable effect In terms of the number of display frames from the start, it will be the α-th frame), and a release effect (for example, release effects shown in FIGS. 68 and 69) for releasing the acquired first game privilege, and release by the release effect. A predetermined effect corresponding to the first game privilege received (for example, if it is determined in FIG. 47 that the cut-in notice effect stock is to be executed, an effect of pressing the effect button 35 shown in FIG. 69(r), for example, If it is determined in FIG. 47 that the development production stock is to be executed, the first decorative member 33a (production accessory) shown in FIG. If a second acquisition condition different from the condition is satisfied (for example, it is determined to execute a change timer effect in FIG. 54, for example, it is determined to execute an event timer effect in FIG. 54), a second game privilege (for example, in FIG. A white character timer HTW in the timer effect shown (so-called “timer icon”) is obtained, and the period in the obtained second game privilege (for example, “5 seconds left” of the white character timer HTW in the timer effect shown in FIG. 62) and a post-update effect after updating the period (e.g., "0 seconds left"). 62(d) and the SPSP ready-to-win effect shown in FIG. 63(e)) can be executed. A predetermined effect is performed (for example, if it is a button PUSH icon, a single effect such as pressing the effect button 35 is generated. For example, if it is a gimmick activation icon, the first decorative member 33a (effect accessory) moves downward. A single effect such as (falling) occurs), and in the post-update effect, a plurality of post-update effects ) and the SPSP ready-to-win effect shown in FIG. 63(e).
As a result, it is possible to execute a predetermined performance in which the contents of the performance to be executed are easy to predict and an updated performance in which the contents of the performance to be executed are difficult to predict, so that performances rich in variety can be executed. Therefore, it leads to further enhancement of performance interest.

(g) As a seventh configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (for example, a jackpot game) advantageous to the player, the starting area Acquisition means (e.g., main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (e.g., special figure determination information) based on entry of game balls into (e.g., first start port 14, second start port 15), Determination means (e.g., main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on determination information (e.g., jackpot determination processing), and production control means for executing a variable effect according to the result of the determination (For example, effect control board 120), and the effect control means determines that the first acquisition condition is met (for example, determines that stock for cut-in notice effect is executed in FIG. 47, for example, develops effect in FIG. 47). 47), the first game privilege (for example, if it is determined to execute the cut-in notice effect stock in FIG. 47, the button PUSH icon shown in FIG. 66, for example, the development effect Gimmick activation icon if it is determined to execute the stock) acquisition effect (for example, acquisition effect shown in FIG. 67), and a predetermined release condition is established after the acquisition is performed (for example, variable effect In terms of the number of display frames from the start, it will be the α-th frame), and a release effect (for example, release effects shown in FIGS. 68 and 69) for releasing the acquired first game privilege, and release by the release effect. A predetermined effect corresponding to the first game privilege received (for example, if it is determined in FIG. 47 that the cut-in notice effect stock is to be executed, an effect of pressing the effect button 35 shown in FIG. 69(r), for example, If it is determined in FIG. 47 that the development production stock is to be executed, the first decorative member 33a (production accessory) shown in FIG. If a second acquisition condition different from the condition is satisfied (for example, it is determined to execute a change timer effect in FIG. 54, for example, it is determined to execute an event timer effect in FIG. 54), a second game privilege (for example, in FIG. A white-character timer HTW in the timer effect shown in FIG. ) toward the final numerical value (for example, “0 seconds left” of the white character timer HTW in the timer effect shown in FIG. 62). and a post-update effect after updating the numerical information to the final value (for example, a effect executed after “0 seconds left”, shown in FIG. 62(d) The variable icon change effect and the SPSP ready-to-win effect shown in FIG. (For example, the button push icon and the gimmick activation icon describe the content of the effect corresponding to the release, but do not describe when it will be executed), and the second game privilege is provided to the player. is notified in a manner in which the execution timing of the post-update effect can be recognized (for example, the white character timer HTW in the timer effect shown in FIG. It is possible to recognize that the post-update effect will be executed when the result of the subtraction is "0 seconds left").
As a result, it is possible to provide enjoyment such as when the predetermined performance will be executed from the first game privilege, and to recognize in advance when the performance after update will be executed from the second game privilege. Therefore, it is possible to execute a variety of performances. Therefore, it leads to further enhancement of performance interest.

(h) As an eighth configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (for example, a jackpot game) advantageous to the player, the starting area Acquisition means (e.g., main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (e.g., special figure determination information) based on entry of game balls into (e.g., first start port 14, second start port 15), Determination means (e.g., main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on determination information (e.g., jackpot determination processing), and production control means for executing a variable effect according to the result of the determination (For example, effect control board 120), and the effect control means determines that the first acquisition condition is met (for example, determines that stock for cut-in notice effect is executed in FIG. 47, for example, develops effect in FIG. 47). 47), the first game privilege (for example, if it is determined to execute the cut-in notice effect stock in FIG. 47, the button PUSH icon shown in FIG. 66, for example, the development effect Gimmick activation icon if it is determined to execute the stock) acquisition effect (for example, acquisition effect shown in FIG. 67), and a predetermined release condition is established after the acquisition is performed (for example, variable effect In terms of the number of display frames from the start, it will be the α-th frame), and a release effect (for example, release effects shown in FIGS. 68 and 69) for releasing the acquired first game privilege, and release by the release effect. A predetermined effect corresponding to the first game privilege received (for example, if it is determined in FIG. 47 that the cut-in notice effect stock is to be executed, an effect of pressing the effect button 35 shown in FIG. 69(r), for example, If it is determined in FIG. 47 that the development production stock is to be executed, the first decorative member 33a (production accessory) shown in FIG. If a second acquisition condition different from the condition is satisfied (for example, it is determined to execute a change timer effect in FIG. 54, for example, it is determined to execute an event timer effect in FIG. 54), a second game privilege (for example, in FIG. A white character timer HTW in the timer effect shown (so-called “timer icon”) is obtained, and the period in the obtained second game privilege (for example, “5 seconds left” of the white character timer HTW in the timer effect shown in FIG. 62) and a post-update effect after updating the period (e.g., "0 seconds left"). 62(d) and the SPSP ready-to-reach effect shown in FIG. 63(e) can be executed, and the content of the predetermined effect is suggested in the release effect. (for example, "?" shown in FIG. 69(q)). A button PUSH icon appears from the icon and is displayed as a button PUSH icon HG, for example, a gimmick activation icon KG1 shown in FIG. 62 (d ), the display is limited to “GO!!”, and execution of the variable icon change effect is not suggested) The post-update effect (for example, the variable icon change effect) is executed.
Thus, in the post-update performance, it is possible to provide enjoyment such as what kind of post-update performance will be performed until the post-update performance is executed, and in the predetermined performance, it is possible to recognize in advance what kind of predetermined performance will be executed. Therefore, it is possible to execute a variety of performances. Therefore, it leads to further enhancement of performance interest.

(i) As a ninth configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (for example, a jackpot game) advantageous to the player, the starting area Acquisition means (e.g., main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (e.g., special figure determination information) based on entry of game balls into (e.g., first start port 14, second start port 15), Determination means (e.g., main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on determination information (e.g., jackpot determination processing), and production control means for executing a variable effect according to the result of the determination (For example, the production control board 120), and the production control means determines that a predetermined acquisition condition is met (for example, determines that the stock for tenpai production is executed in FIG. is executed), an acquisition effect (for example, an acquisition effect shown in FIG. 73) for acquiring a game privilege (for example, a single button hit icon, button repeated icon shown in FIG. 72), and a predetermined release after the acquisition is performed A release effect (for example, release effect shown in FIG. 74) for releasing the acquired game privilege when a condition is satisfied (for example, the number of display frames from the start of the variable effect is α-th frame), and the release effect A predetermined effect corresponding to the game privilege released by the effect (for example, effect of pressing the button shown in FIGS. 74 (k) and (l) to apply reach (tenpai effect), buttons shown in FIGS. is repeatedly hit to drop the gimmick (decisive effect 2)), and after the game privilege is acquired by the acquisition effect and until the predetermined release condition is satisfied, The acquired game privilege (e.g., button single-press icon) can be notified by a predetermined notification means (e.g., image display device 31) (e.g., can be displayed as an acquired icon KG1 on image display device 31), and the game privilege can be changed from a first notification mode (for example, button single-press icon) to a second notification mode (for example, button repeated icon) while being notified by the predetermined notification means.
As a result, since the game privilege may change from the first notification mode to the second notification mode, even after the game privilege is acquired, the player is interested in the change to the second notification mode. be able to. Therefore, it leads to further enhancement of performance interest.

(j) As a tenth configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (for example, a jackpot game) advantageous to the player, the starting area Acquisition means (e.g., main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (e.g., special figure determination information) based on entry of game balls into (e.g., first start port 14, second start port 15), Determination means (e.g., main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on determination information (e.g., jackpot determination processing), and production control means for executing a variable effect according to the result of the determination (For example, production control board 120), and the production control means includes a first production mode (for example, production mode in normal game state) and a second production mode (for example, production mode in normal game state) different from the first production mode For example, it is possible to control with a production mode in a high-probability time-saving game state), and a predetermined acquisition condition is established (for example, it is determined to execute the stock for cut-in notice production in FIG. 47, for example, for tenpai production in FIG. 51 If it is determined to execute the stock), then a game privilege (for example, if it is determined to execute the cut-in notice effect stock in FIG. 47, the button PUSH icon, for example, it is determined to execute the tenpai effect stock in FIG. 51) button single-hit icon) to acquire (for example, the acquisition effect shown in FIG. 67, for example, the acquisition effect shown in FIG. In terms of the number of display frames from the start of the game, it will be the α-th frame), a release effect (for example, the release effect shown in FIG. 69, for example, the release effect shown in FIG. 74) for releasing the acquired game privilege, A predetermined effect corresponding to the game privilege released by the release effect (for example, if it is determined to execute the cut-in notice effect stock in FIG. 47, the cut-in effect shown in FIG. If it is determined in 51 that the stock for tenpai effect is to be executed, the tenpai effect shown in FIGS. until the predetermined release condition is satisfied, the obtained game privilege (for example, button push icon, button single hit icon) can be notified by predetermined notification means (for example, image display device 31) (for example, If it is a button PUSH icon, it can be displayed on the image display device 31 as an acquired icon KG4. and if it is a button single-press icon, it can be displayed as an acquired icon KG1 on the image display device 31), and the game privilege notified by the predetermined notification means is divided into the first effect mode and the second effect mode. (For example, although there is no difference in the function of operating the effect button 35 in either case, the icon "button push" is displayed in the first stock effect, and the icon "button push" is displayed in the second stock effect. (Displayed by the icon "single button press").
As a result, whether it is a game privilege in the first stock effect (icon prompting the operation of the effect button 35) in the normal game state or a game privilege in the second stock effect (the icon prompting the operation of the effect button 35) in the high-probability time-saving game state ), and the game state can be grasped from the game privilege. In particular, since the functional aspect of operating the production button 35 is common in all cases, making the notification mode different will also lead to the promotion of understanding by the player. Therefore, it leads to further enhancement of performance interest.

(k) As an eleventh configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (for example, a jackpot game) advantageous to the player, the starting area Acquisition means (e.g., main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (e.g., special figure determination information) based on entry of game balls into (e.g., first start port 14, second start port 15), Determination means (e.g., main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on determination information (e.g., jackpot determination processing), and production control means for executing a variable effect according to the result of the determination (For example, production control board 120), and sound output means (for example, sound output device 32) capable of outputting sound, and the production control means is configured so that a predetermined acquisition condition is established (for example, Tenpai in FIG. If it is determined that the performance stock is executed, for example, it is determined that the performance 2 stock is executed in FIG. 73), and when a predetermined release condition is satisfied after the acquisition (for example, the number of display frames from the start of the variable effect is the α-th frame), the acquired game privilege is released. A release effect to be released (for example, a release effect shown in FIG. 74) and a predetermined effect according to the game privilege released by the release effect (for example, reach by pressing the buttons shown in FIGS. 74 (k) and (l)) 74(o), 74(p), and a gimmick drop effect (decision effect 2)). , there are cases in which a specific acquisition sound is output and cases in which the specific acquisition sound is not output (for example, as shown in FIG. 73, when a button repeatedly hitting icon is acquired, " Outputs the sound "Kakeen ♪", and outputs the sound "Pong ♪" when the button single-hit icon is acquired).
As a result, even if the player does not visually recognize the image display device 31, it becomes easier for the player to recognize what he or she has obtained as a game privilege, which leads to further improvement of the performance interest.

(l) As a twelfth configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (for example, a jackpot game) advantageous to the player, the starting area Acquisition means (e.g., main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (e.g., special figure determination information) based on entry of game balls into (e.g., first start port 14, second start port 15), Determination means (e.g., main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on determination information (e.g., jackpot determination processing), and production control means for executing a variable effect according to the result of the determination (For example, the production control board 120), and the production control means determines that a predetermined acquisition condition is met (for example, determines that the stock for tenpai production is executed in FIG. is executed), an acquisition effect (for example, an acquisition effect shown in FIG. 73) for acquiring a game privilege (for example, a single button hit icon, button repeated icon shown in FIG. 72), and a predetermined release after the acquisition is performed A release effect (for example, release effect shown in FIG. 74) for releasing the acquired game privilege when a condition is satisfied (for example, the number of display frames from the start of the variable effect is α-th frame), and the release effect A predetermined effect corresponding to the game privilege released by the effect (for example, effect of pressing the button shown in FIGS. 74 (k) and (l) to apply reach (tenpai effect), buttons shown in FIGS. (Decisive effect 2)), and the game privilege includes a first game privilege (for example, button repeated icon), and the first game privilege. has a different second game privilege (for example, a button single-press icon), and in the acquisition effect, the single first game privilege and the plurality of the second game privileges are obtained by the establishment of the predetermined acquisition condition of one It is possible to obtain benefits (for example, it is possible to obtain one button repeated hitting icon and two button single hitting icons by operating the effect button 35 once).
As a result, in the acquisition performance, a plurality of icons can be acquired by one operation of the performance button 35, so that the player can feel that he/she has won the game, and the feeling of expectation for the award of the big winning game can be improved. .

(m) As a thirteenth configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (for example, a jackpot game) advantageous to the player, the starting region Acquisition means (e.g., main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (e.g., special figure determination information) based on entry of game balls into (e.g., first start port 14, second start port 15), Determination means (e.g., main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on determination information (e.g., jackpot determination processing), and production control means for executing a variable effect according to the result of the determination (For example, the production control board 120), and the production control means determines that a predetermined acquisition condition is met (for example, determines that the stock for tenpai production is executed in FIG. is executed), an acquisition effect (for example, an acquisition effect shown in FIG. 73) for acquiring a game privilege (for example, a single button hit icon, button repeated icon shown in FIG. 72), and a predetermined release after the acquisition is performed A release effect (for example, release effect shown in FIG. 74) for releasing the acquired game privilege when a condition is satisfied (for example, the number of display frames from the start of the variable effect is α-th frame), and the release effect A predetermined effect corresponding to the game privilege released by the effect (for example, effect of pressing the button shown in FIGS. 74 (k) and (l) to apply reach (tenpai effect), buttons shown in FIGS. (Decisive effect 2)), and the game privilege includes a first game privilege (for example, button repeated icon), and the first game privilege. has a different second game privilege (for example, a button single-hit icon), and the number of benefits (for example, the production button 35 operation count) can be varied (the effect button 35 can be operated more times with the repeated button-press icon than with the single-button-press icon).
As a result, it is possible to make the player want to acquire a game privilege that allows a larger number of privileges to be acquired, and to play the game. Therefore, it leads to further enhancement of performance interest.

(n) As a 14th configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (for example, a jackpot game) advantageous to the player, the starting area Acquisition means (e.g., main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (e.g., special figure determination information) based on entry of game balls into (e.g., first start port 14, second start port 15), Determination means (e.g., main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on determination information (e.g., jackpot determination processing), and production control means for executing a variable effect according to the result of the determination (For example, the production control board 120), and the production control means determines that a predetermined acquisition condition is met (for example, determines that the stock for tenpai production is executed in FIG. is executed), an acquisition effect (for example, an acquisition effect shown in FIG. 73) for acquiring a game privilege (for example, a single button hit icon, button repeated icon shown in FIG. 72), and a predetermined release after the acquisition is performed A release effect (for example, release effect shown in FIG. 74) for releasing the acquired game privilege when a condition is satisfied (for example, the number of display frames from the start of the variable effect is α-th frame), and the release effect A predetermined effect corresponding to the game privilege released by the effect (for example, effect of pressing the button shown in FIGS. 74 (k) and (l) to apply reach (tenpai effect), buttons shown in FIGS. (Decisive effect 2)), and the game privilege includes a first game privilege (for example, button repeated icon), and the first game privilege. has a different second game privilege (e.g., button single-hit icon), and the first privilege (e.g., , the number of icons provided) are the same (for example, one icon can be obtained for both), but the number of second benefits that can be obtained (for example, the number of operations of the effect button 35) can be varied. (For example, the number of times the production button 35 is operated is greater for the button repeated icon than for the button single-press icon).
As a result, it is possible to make the player want to acquire a game privilege that allows a larger number of privileges to be acquired, and to play the game. Therefore, it leads to further enhancement of performance interest.

(O) As a fifteenth configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (for example, a jackpot game) advantageous to the player, the starting area Acquisition means (e.g., main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (e.g., special figure determination information) based on entry of game balls into (e.g., first start port 14, second start port 15), Determination means (e.g., main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on determination information (e.g., jackpot determination processing), and production control means for executing a variable effect according to the result of the determination (For example, effect control board 120), and the effect control means determines that a predetermined acquisition condition is satisfied 66, e.g., button single hit icon, button repeated hit icon shown in FIG. 73), and when a predetermined release condition is satisfied after the acquisition (for example, the number of display frames from the start of the variable effect is the α-th frame), the acquired game privilege is released. A release effect to be released (for example, a release effect shown in FIG. 69, for example, a release effect shown in FIG. 74), and a predetermined effect according to the game privilege released by the release effect (for example, a cut shown in FIG. 69 (s) It is possible to execute an in effect, for example, an effect of pressing the button shown in FIGS. and a second acquisition state (e.g., second stock effect) different from the first acquisition state. (For example, in the first stock effect, it is impossible to obtain a plurality of icons with one variation), but in the second acquisition state, it is difficult to obtain a plurality of game benefits for a predetermined period of time. It is easy to obtain a plurality of game benefits in (for example, one variation effect) (for example, in the second stock effect, it is possible to obtain a plurality of icons in one variation).
As a result, different acquisition effects can be executed between the first acquisition effect and the second acquisition effect, which leads to further improvement in performance interest.

(p) As a 16th configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (for example, a jackpot game) advantageous to the player, the starting area Acquisition means (e.g., main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (e.g., special figure determination information) based on entry of game balls into (e.g., first start port 14, second start port 15), Determination means (eg, main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on determination information (eg, jackpot determination processing), and a normal game state (eg, normal game state) and the normal game state A game state control means (for example, the main control board 110) capable of controlling a specific game state (for example, a high-probability time-saving game state) different from the production control means for executing a variable production according to the determination result (For example, effect control board 120), and the effect control means determines that a predetermined acquisition condition is satisfied 66, e.g., button single hit icon, button repeated hit icon shown in FIG. 73), and when a predetermined release condition is satisfied after the acquisition (for example, the number of display frames from the start of the variable effect is the α-th frame), the acquired game privilege is released. A release effect to be released (for example, a release effect shown in FIG. 69, for example, a release effect shown in FIG. 74) and a predetermined effect according to the game privilege released by the release effect (for example, a cut shown in FIG. 69 (s) It is possible to perform an in-effect, for example, an effect (tenpai effect) to press the button shown in FIGS. button PUSH icon) and a second game privilege different from the first game privilege (for example, a button single-hit icon), and in the normal game state, the second game privilege is higher than the first game privilege It is easy to acquire game benefits (for example, in the first stock effect executed in the normal game state, the button PUSH icon is acquired and the button single-hit icon is not acquired), and in the specific game state, it is easier to acquire the game privilege than the second game privilege. It is easy to acquire the first game privilege (for example, in the second stock effect executed in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, the button single-hit icon is acquired, button PUSH icon is not acquired).
As a result, the game benefits that are easy to obtain differ depending on the game state, which leads to further enhancement of the performance interest.

(q) As a 17th configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (for example, a jackpot game) advantageous to the player, the starting area Acquisition means (e.g., main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (e.g., special figure determination information) based on entry of game balls into (e.g., first start port 14, second start port 15), Determination means (e.g., main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on determination information (e.g., jackpot determination processing), and production control means for executing a variable effect according to the result of the determination (For example, the production control board 120), and the production control means determines that a predetermined acquisition condition is met (for example, determines that the stock for tenpai production is executed in FIG. is executed), an acquisition effect (for example, an acquisition effect shown in FIG. 73) for acquiring a game privilege (for example, a single button hit icon, button repeated icon shown in FIG. 72), and a predetermined release after the acquisition is performed A release effect (for example, release effect shown in FIG. 74) for releasing the acquired game privilege when a condition is satisfied (for example, the number of display frames from the start of the variable effect is α-th frame), and the release effect A predetermined effect corresponding to the game privilege released by the effect (for example, effect of pressing the button shown in FIGS. 74 (k) and (l) to apply reach (tenpai effect), buttons shown in FIGS. is repeatedly hit to drop the gimmick (decisive effect 2)), and it is possible to acquire a plurality of the game benefits, and in the release effect, the order in which they were obtained in the acquisition effect is performed. There are cases where the game benefits are released (for example, FIGS. 73 and 74) and cases where the game benefits are released in an order different from the order in which the game benefits are acquired in the acquisition effect (for example, FIG. 76). and
As a result, for example, it may be released from a game privilege acquired later, so that it is possible to impart surprise to the player. Therefore, it leads to further enhancement of performance interest.

(r) As an eighteenth configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (for example, a jackpot game) advantageous to the player, the starting area Acquisition means (e.g., main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (e.g., special figure determination information) based on entry of game balls into (e.g., first start port 14, second start port 15), Determination means (e.g., main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on determination information (e.g., jackpot determination processing), and production control means for executing a variable effect according to the result of the determination (For example, the production control board 120), and the production control means determines that a predetermined acquisition condition is met (for example, determines that the stock for tenpai production is executed in FIG. is executed), an acquisition effect (for example, an acquisition effect shown in FIG. 73) for acquiring a game privilege (for example, a single button hit icon, button repeated icon shown in FIG. 72), and a predetermined release after the acquisition is performed A release effect (for example, release effect shown in FIG. 74) for releasing the acquired game privilege when a condition is satisfied (for example, the number of display frames from the start of the variable effect is α-th frame), and the release effect A predetermined effect corresponding to the game privilege released by the effect (for example, effect of pressing the button shown in FIGS. 74 (k) and (l) to apply reach (tenpai effect), buttons shown in FIGS. is repeatedly hit to drop the gimmick (fixed effect 2)), and the variable effect can be terminated by a stop effect that stops and displays the identification information after temporarily stopping it, The game privilege can be acquired even when the stop effect is being executed (for example, in the second stock effect, when the effect symbol 38 is temporarily stopped, or when the effect symbol 38 is stopped and displayed). You can get the icon even when you are
As a result, it is possible to provide the player with surprise. Therefore, it leads to further enhancement of performance interest.

(s) As a 19th configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (for example, a jackpot game) advantageous to the player, the starting area Acquisition means (e.g., main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (e.g., special figure determination information) based on entry of game balls into (e.g., first start port 14, second start port 15), Determination means (e.g., main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on determination information (e.g., jackpot determination processing), and production control means for executing a variable effect according to the result of the determination (For example, the effect control board 120), and the effect control means determines that a predetermined acquisition condition is met (for example, determines that the tenpai effect stock is executed in FIG. 51, for example, determines the effect 2 stock in FIG. is executed), an acquisition effect (for example, an acquisition effect shown in FIG. 73) for acquiring a game privilege (for example, a single button hit icon, button repeated icon shown in FIG. 72), and a predetermined release after the acquisition is performed A release effect (for example, the release effect shown in FIG. 74) for releasing the acquired game privilege when a condition is established (for example, the α-th frame in terms of the number of display frames from the start of the variable effect), and the release effect. A predetermined effect corresponding to the game privilege released by the effect (for example, an effect of pressing the button shown in FIGS. is repeatedly hit to drop the gimmick (fixed effect 2)), and the game privilege can be released in a plurality of the variable effects, and the first in the variable effect When the special game is reached without releasing the game privilege in the variable effect (for example, when the variable effect pattern 81 is performed while the icon is not used in the second stock effect), it is performed after the special game is completed. It is possible to release the game privilege that has not been released in a second variable effect (for example, a variable effect pattern 58) in the variable effect that is performed.
As a result, even if the special game is played without releasing the game privilege, it can be released in the variable performance after the special game is finished, so that the player does not feel a loss. . Therefore, it leads to further enhancement of performance interest.

(t) As a twentieth configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (for example, a jackpot game) advantageous to the player, the starting area Acquisition means (e.g., main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (e.g., special figure determination information) based on entry of game balls into (e.g., first start port 14, second start port 15), Determination means (e.g., main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on determination information (e.g., jackpot determination processing), and production control means for executing a variable effect according to the result of the determination (For example, effect control board 120), and the effect control means is provided with a game privilege (for example, a button single hit icon shown in FIG. 72, when a predetermined acquisition condition is satisfied (for example, effect button 35 is operated) (for example, the acquisition effect shown in FIG. 77), and a predetermined release condition is established after the acquisition is performed (for example, α When it becomes the second frame), a release effect (for example, the release effect shown in FIG. 78) for releasing the acquired game privilege, and a predetermined effect according to the game privilege released by the release effect (for example, FIG. 78 (j ), and an effect of dropping the gimmick by single-pressing the button indicated by (k) (fixed effect 2)), and the game privilege can be obtained up to a predetermined upper limit number, The game privilege includes a first game privilege (for example, a privilege to operate the effect button 35) and a second game privilege (for example, a privilege to provide an icon) different from the first game privilege. , and if the predetermined acquisition condition of 1 is satisfied after reaching the upper limit of the predetermined number, only the second game privilege is granted without granting the first game privilege (for example, FIG. 77, as shown in FIG. 78, when the effect button 35 is operated after the maximum number of icons to be obtained is reached, only the icon is given and the given icon is not released).
As a result, the second game privilege is apparently given to the player, so that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling that he or she has lost money. Therefore, it leads to further enhancement of performance interest.

In addition, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is assumed to shift to a high-probability game state over a predetermined number of times after all the jackpot games are finished, but the first big winning port 16 opened in a specific round game of the jackpot game Alternatively, when a game ball passes through a specific area provided inside the second big winning hole 17, the game machine may be configured to shift to a high-probability game state for a predetermined number of times after the end of the jackpot game.

In addition, after all the jackpot games are completed, the high-probability game state is entered, and when the falling lottery executed at the start of the variable display of the special symbols in the high-probability game state is won, the high-probability game state is ended and the normal It may be a game machine that returns to the game state.

In addition, when the type of the special jackpot pattern is the normal pattern, it is shifted to the low probability game state after the end of the jackpot game, and when the type of the special jackpot pattern is the specific pattern, the next game is played after the end of the jackpot game. The game machine may be configured to shift to a high-probability game state that continues until the jackpot game.

Further, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are not executed at the same time (in parallel), and the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed. However, the gaming machine may be such that the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are performed at the same time (in parallel), or the variable display of the first special symbol may be given priority. may be executed by

Incidentally, the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to pachinko gaming machines, and can also be used for reel-type gaming machines (so-called slot machines). Furthermore, it can also be used for a Jankyu game machine and an arrange ball game machine.

In addition, the embodiments disclosed this time should be considered as examples in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the scope of the claims rather than the above description, and is intended to include meanings equivalent to the scope of the claims and all modifications within the scope.

1 game machine 31 image display device 32 audio output device 110 main control board 110a main CPU
110b Main ROM
110c Main RAM
120 production control board 120a sub CPU
120b Sub-ROM
120c sub-RAM
150 image control unit

Claims (1)

In a gaming machine capable of executing a special game advantageous to a player,
Acquisition means for acquiring determination information based on the entry of the game ball into the starting area;
Determination means for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information;
A production control means for executing a variable production according to the result of the determination,
The production control means is
executing the variable effect with the variable display of the symbols , and stopping and displaying the symbols in a manner indicating the result of the determination after a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable display;
an acquisition effect that enables acquisition of a first game privilege that suggests the possibility that the special game will be executed when a first acquisition condition is satisfied during execution of the stop display;
a release effect for releasing the acquired first game privilege when a predetermined release condition is satisfied after the acquisition effect is performed;
A predetermined effect according to the first game privilege released by the release effect;
an update effect of acquiring a second game privilege when a second acquisition condition different from the first acquisition condition is established, and updating the period of the acquired second game privilege;
a post-update effect after the update of the period is completed , and
The release effect suggests the content of the predetermined effect, and the predetermined effect is executed after executing the release effect,
executing the post-update effect without suggesting the content of the post-update effect after completing the update of the period in the update effect;
It is possible to execute the special game without releasing the obtained first game privilege in the release effect,
After the special game ends, the first game privilege that has not been released can be released ,
The acquired first game privilege can be notified by displaying a predetermined image,
The predetermined image includes a first privilege image and a second privilege image different from the first privilege image,
A gaming machine in which a different privilege is given to a player after the first privilege image is displayed and the second privilege image is displayed .

Images